JP6743950B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a display unit having a display unit,
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
Display control means for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means and displaying an image on the display section based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
First frame control means for displaying a first frame image including a specific individual image using the first still image data stored in advance in the display storage means;
Second frame control means for displaying a second frame image including the specific individual image by using second still image data stored in advance in the display storage means,
At the update timing of the image after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed, the intermediate image data previously stored in the display storage means is used. And an intermediate control means for displaying an intermediate image that does not include the specific individual image,
Equipped with
The predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image is the position on the front side of the predetermined operation path with respect to the predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image. The first still image data and the second still image data are set so that
The intermediate image data is set so that the intermediate individual image displayed in the intermediate image is displaced along the predetermined operation path.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of (a)-(j) symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for big hit generation lottery, etc. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by the sound-light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a notice lottery table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a reach lottery table, (c) Explains the structure of sound light side RAM. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a control pattern table. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining how the symbols are displayed in a swing on the symbol display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the symbols are fixedly displayed on the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) various parts tables. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variable display time defined by (a1)-(a3), (b1)-(b3) parts table. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed in the sound-light side MPU. (A) ~ (e2) It is a time chart showing how the game reproduction effect is executed. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) drawing list. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. It is a time chart which shows an example of the variable display mode of (a)-(f) design. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of work RAM. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for 1st high speed periods. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for 1st low speed periods. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the value set to the 1st adjustment counter and the 3rd adjustment counter, and the kind of symbol, (b) With the value set to the 2nd adjustment counter. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the kind of symbol. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for 1st high speed periods. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for 1st low speed periods. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing performed by a display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for normal changes performed by the display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) loop display production. It is a time chart which shows the flow of (a)-(d) loop display production. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of work RAM. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a character retention table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a character movement table, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a background table. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for character loops performed by a display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows arithmetic processing for a background loop performed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) group display production. It is an explanatory view for explaining moving picture data for group display. (A1) to (a3) are time charts showing the relationship between the image update cycle and the cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) draw the same decoded image data in the drawing target frame area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect which makes the range to differ. It is a flow chart which shows the arithmetic processing for group display production performed by the display CPU. (A) is a flowchart showing a decoding process executed by a moving picture decoder, and (b) is a flowchart showing a group display setting process executed by a VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) effective period display production. It is a time chart which shows the comparative example of (a), (b) effective period display production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining a band display table, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a blinking display table. (A1), (b1), (a2), (b2) is a time chart showing how the effective period display effect is executed using both the band display table and the blinking display table. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for a valid period display performed by a display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the number display effect. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing a number display effect. It is a front view of the said inner frame which expands and shows the lower area|region of an inner frame. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a count performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output setting process of the measurement command performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows measurement command corresponding processing performed by a display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows calculation processing for measurement display performed by a display CPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(c) number display production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the increase display performed by a display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image for 1st characters, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an effect image, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image for 2nd characters. .. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner of changing the drawing range in a frame area of a drawing target in each image data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a table for pseudo moving images. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(d) pseudo animation production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for a pseudo moving image production performed by a display CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the calculation processing for the round production which is executed with the indicatory CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of (a)-(c) pseudo moving image production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) drawing list. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a situation in which drawing data is created in accordance with execution of drawing processing. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(c) time corresponding production is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device in a normal period, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device in a preparatory period, (c) Special period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing how the time-corresponding effect is executed in relation to the execution status of the game diversion effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the sound light side ROM, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for time corresponding productions. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC corresponding process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for starting a preparatory period performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the preparatory period performed by the sound and light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the special period performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining another example of the display contents of the symbol display device in the preparation period. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process for starting the preparation period, which is executed by the MPU on the sound and light side. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the command corresponding process performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process during the preparatory period performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of (a), (b) separate preservation production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the comparative example of (a)-(c) another preservation production. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a preservation production according to (a)-(h) is performed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of (a)-(c) another preservation production. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for another preservation productions performed by the display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during an operation effective period performed by a display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during operation corresponding production performed by a display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting process for another storage display executed by VDP. 9 is a flowchart showing a drawing data creation process for separate storage display executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific display content of (a), (b) angle display production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. (A)-(i) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various moving image data groups. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(g) angle display production progresses. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for angle display effects performed by the display CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an opening process executed by the display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the decoding processing performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the moving image corresponding table corresponding to A angle, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching reference table. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for the angle display production which is executed with VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of normal moving image data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of special moving image data. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(g) special animation use production is performed. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for special animation use effects performed by a display CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for special animated picture use production which is executed with VDP.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. .. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 such that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the guiding means. The guide rail is configured as. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided by guide rails to the upper part of the game area PA. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by manually operating the launching operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when a ball enters the first operation port 33 or a ball enters the second operation port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , 10 prize balls are paid out when a ball is thrown into the general winning opening 31, and 15 prize balls are paid out when a ball is thrown into the special electric prize winning device 32. Executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the game ball entering the outlet 24a, the general prize hole 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, the both operating ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second working port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, the prize can enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operation port 34 in the flow-down direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by the winning of the prize in the through gate 35, and a public figure display of the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is finished, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The universal figure display section 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device is provided. , Other types of display devices such as CRTs or dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the public figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by turning on the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display portion 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display portion 37a, the jackpot occurrence lottery is triggered by the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, thereby performing variable display of the pattern. Then, as a stop result after the variable display of the pattern is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery is performed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device is provided. , Other types of display devices such as CRTs or dot matrix displays. As the picture displayed on the special figure display portion 37a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the variable display of the symbol is performed accordingly. Be seen. That is, when the variable display is performed on the special figure display portion 37a, the variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game game in which the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery is a jackpot result, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line preset in the symbol display device 41.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) are display surfaces of the symbol display device 41. It is a figure which shows P.

As shown in FIG. 3(a) to FIG. 3(j), the design, which is a type of design, includes nine types of main designs to which the numbers “1” to “9” are respectively attached and shell-shaped design designs. And a sub-pattern consisting of. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively added to nine types of character designs such as octopus to form the main design.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols in these symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display surface P. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is finished, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R certainty variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols" and even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). The main symbol corresponds to "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same specific symbols or the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the usual big hit result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and thereafter, An explicit video is displayed.

The mode of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

Further, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, when the jackpot is generated in the jackpot occurrence lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, it is possible to win the special electricity winning device 32. To the open/close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 has a big winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won, and when the game is transferred to the open/close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to the open state in which the game balls can be won. It has become. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the opened state. In the opening/closing execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 42 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent. However, the window panel 43 is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 43. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window 42. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulge portion 46 and a lower bulge portion 47 which bulge toward the front side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 46a that is open upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that is also open upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing the game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 46a.

In the area outside the lower plate 47a in the lower bulging portion 47, a production operating device 48 having an operating portion that is manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to make the effect contents on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 and the like into predetermined effect contents.

A main controller, a sound emission controller, and a display controller are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism section including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply/launch control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening should be provided to the substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 51 and the like. You may Examples of the trace means include a constitution of a joint portion (a caulking portion) that requires inseparable joining of a plurality of case bodies constituting a substrate box and requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, and an adhesive layer is an object to be adhered at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. In addition, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be included in separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The power supply/fire control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply/launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as a payout control device 55 and a display control device 70 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply/launch control device 57. In this case, the power failure monitoring board monitors the occurrence of the power failure, and when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes the processing for the power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, the detection is provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning portion corresponding to the winning portion such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize determination (ball determination) to each ball receiving portion. In addition, the MPU 52 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery and the jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the first operating mouth 33 and the second operating mouth 34, and also executes the reach generating lottery for each game time and the determination lottery of the variable display time. To do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information at the time of playing a game, and performs jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display portion 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display portion 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used in the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the special symbol display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41. And the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time. Furthermore, the general electric utility article release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not to put the general electric utility article 34a of the second operation port 34 into the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 54b as an acquisition information storage unit when the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 occurs. Stored in.

The hold storage area 54b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is recorded in the holding area RE. In addition, numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winning in the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE2 The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of →third holding area RE3→fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is stored up to four at maximum. .. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 37a, and at the start of one game time. Is judged on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

For details of each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by “1” in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Particularly, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a win/loss table. A win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode are set as the win/loss table. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the jackpot occurrence lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big win is 20. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 29, and then returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the jackpot occurrence lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) an opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode of the second working port 34 in the general electric accessory 34a.

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the special winning opening is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have passed or the special winning opening is won. It is continued until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the big winning opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings to the big winning opening. Will be continued until there are six.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. To be done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. Also, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is high. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, there is substantially no winning of the special electricity winning device 32. It is good to For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set to be shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, the one time opening is performed. The product of the game cycle of the game ball and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. In addition, even if the interval between shooting game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening is not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is generated in the special electric prize winning device 32.

As a support mode of the second working port 34 in the electric utility object 34a, when compared in a situation in which the game balls are continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the second working port 34 has a common mode. The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have the same probability of being in the electric-role open state winning state in the electric-role accessory opening lottery using the general-use officer-item open counter C4 (for example, both are 4/5. However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric officer 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than in the low frequency support mode. The opening time of is set to be long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric power combination open state is elected and the general electric officer's object 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is shorter than the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum secured time required for the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is shorter. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode being in the electric role open state per unit time higher than that of the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric role open lottery It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a secured time that is ensured when the next electric role opening lottery is performed after one electric role opening lottery is performed (for example, on the public figure display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or an average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening the one-time fluctuation display time in the public figure display unit 38a), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, apply any one condition or a condition of any combination. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result, and a 15R certainty variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a big hit result in which the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the big hit occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state winning and the jackpot state is shifted accordingly. In other words, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot state.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state winning and the jackpot state is shifted accordingly. In other words, the 15R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the game state to the 15R certainty variation jackpot state.

In addition, the normal game state in relation to each of the above game states means a state in which the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” correspond to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the manner of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing two kinds of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result is the highest in the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode In the support mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, the high-frequency support mode is the high-frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. The implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result that will be included may be included. In this case, the probability variation jackpot result is further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of miss result in the jackpot occurrence lottery, there is a special miss result that does not occur in the big hit occurrence lottery mode and the support mode transition after the transition to the open/close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode. Good. In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the special outlying result are set as described above, the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. It is common to be done, but because the transition mode of the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is different, for example, when one of the implicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result or special outlier result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible for the player to predict which result it actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and the stop display result after the variable display is specially displayed in the game times in which the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode. In the resulting gaming machine, at the stage before the variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, the player is made to think that the special display result is likely to be the variable display state. Is a display state for.

Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach effect and a notice effect for expecting the occurrence of the reach effect or the occurrence of the special display result in a stage before the reach effect occurs.

In the reach effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, so that a combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode. A combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns is included. Further, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the reach display is performed by displaying the variable symbols in the remaining symbol columns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. , A combination of reach patterns is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to provide a reach effect.

Specifically, regarding the reach effect, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbols, on the preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is generated. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols in which the combination may be established, and the variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence under the situation where the reach line is formed.

Explaining the display contents of FIG. 4 in detail, first, the variable display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and the variable display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Being given will be a reach production. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of symbols is ended.

In the notice production, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, or in a part of the symbol columns. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, a background image having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such advance notice production may occur in both game times when the reach production is performed and when the reach production is not performed, but the case where the reach production is performed is higher than the case where the reach production is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach effect is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game game in which the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Further, in the game times that do not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing refers to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53, and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. Is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to give the advance notice effect is made not by the main control device 50 but by the sound emission control device 60.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used for determining in the MPU 52 the fluctuation display time in the special figure display portion 37a and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process described below. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the special figure display portion 37a and at the time when the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The general electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and then return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric utility article release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric duty holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a to be in the open state based on the stored value of the general electric object object release counter C4.

To the output side of the MPU 52, the payout control device 55 and the power supply/launch control device 57 are connected. To the payout control device 55, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball portion. The payout control device 55 causes the payout device 56 to perform payout control of prize balls and loan balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply/launch control device 57 based on the operation of the firing operation device 28. The power supply/launch control device 57 drives the game ball launching mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Moreover, the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the MPU 52 directly controls the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a. That is, at each game time, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result indicating whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is opened, the MPU 52 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a.

To the output side of the MPU 52, a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening/closing door of the special electric prize device 32, and a general electric member driving unit that opens and closes the general electric member 34a of the second operating port 34 are connected. .. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the special electric winning drive unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric utility object 34a is elected in the open state, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the general electric object driving unit so that the general electric object 34a is opened and closed. Further, an audio emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various production commands are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is activated, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the execution period of such power-on wait processing, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 57 is manually operated, and in subsequent step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 54. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Then, it progresses to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, and the process of step S108 is not executed, and step S109 is performed. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current game state. To do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 54, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, the setting of interrupt permission for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec cycle). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In a succeeding step S202, lottery random number updating processing is executed. In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the present numerical value information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility open counter C4, and the processing of adding 1 to each of the read numerical value information is executed. After that, the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S111, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S204 as in step S112.

In a succeeding step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set to the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54.

In a succeeding step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing from step S207 is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting to the various driving units corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric prize winning drive unit is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stop the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility product 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the information for starting the output of the drive signal to the general utility product drive unit and switching to the closed state is set. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the respective winning detection sensors are read, and whether or not there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. Perform the process to specify.

In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54 is executed. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical value information is aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

In a succeeding step S211, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, as described above, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

In a succeeding step S212, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed as input state monitoring processing based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208.

In a succeeding step S213, special figure special electric power control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 in a situation where the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process of sequentially storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in the pending storage area 54b is executed. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, if the holding information is not in the game play and opening/closing execution mode and the holding information is stored, it is determined whether the holding information corresponds to the jackpot winning or not. If it corresponds to the lottery process and the jackpot winning, a sorting determination process is performed to determine which jackpot result the holding information corresponds to. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the sorting determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence or not. Reach determination processing for determining is performed, and processing for selecting the variation display time of the game time is performed using the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of big hit, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and based on the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the change type counter CS at the timing, The variable display time of the game times is determined. Then, the variation command including the information of the determined variation display time of the game times and the type command including the information of the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is also transmitted. Start the display. As a result, one game time is started, and the effect for game time is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41. Further, the MPU 52 starts measuring the fluctuation display time when the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variation display time corresponding to the game time has elapsed during the execution of one game time, the special figure display portion 37a displays the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution of the current game time. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is maintained for the fixed display time. When the confirmed display time has elapsed, if the current game time corresponds to the miss result, a new game time is started on condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. Execute the process. If the hold information is not stored, the process waits until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result, a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an opening command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, in order to set the jackpot occurrence lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode while transmitting the ending command indicating the end of the opening/closing execution mode to the voice emission control device 60. The process of is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, an opening period is generated over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has been generated in this opening period is executed. After that, the round game in which the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after the round game has been executed a predetermined number of times, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 sec, and an effect is executed to make it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode ends in this ending period. ..

After executing the special figure special electric power control processing of step S213 in the timer interruption processing, the general figure normal electric power control processing is executed in step S214. In the general/universal/universal control process, a process for acquiring the general/universal-university-side pending information is executed when a prize has been paid to the through gate 35, and the general/universal-university-side pending information is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the general figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the second working port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information corresponding to the special figure display portion 37a on the special figure hold display portion 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214. At the same time, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information corresponding to the general figure display section 38a on the general figure hold display section 38b is set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, and the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is changed. Set the output information for updating.

In a succeeding step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, payout output processing for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In a succeeding step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and the end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. After that, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the audio emission control device 60 includes an audio emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and that does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not indispensable, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 50 and the effect operation device 48 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A display light emitting unit 44 and a speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72 of the display control device 70, which will be described later, is connected to the output side.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 via the input port 77. To be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice light emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice light emission control device 60, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay substrate is received. Be done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via the bus, and based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described below.

The memory module 74 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, and moving image data. Various image data are stored in advance. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described later in detail.

The work RAM 73 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 74 and transferred, and also temporarily storing a flag and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to the SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 includes a developing buffer 81. Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 76 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 76 should be called a microcomputer chip having a dedicated drawing firmware.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving picture decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 and the I/F 96 for the VRAM 75.

The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. It should be noted that all of the control programs for the control unit 91 to operate may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory pre-stored with the control program may be built in the control unit 91 and the contents of the control program and the drawing list may be stored. The control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process according to the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 74.

As the above processing, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data read to the expansion buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame means the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, in the situation where drawing on the symbol display device 41 is being executed using drawing data created in one frame area. , Drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 78. More specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is resolution-adjusted by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41, and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. Further, the moving picture decoder 93 executes decoding of the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 62 of Sound Emission Control Device 60>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound-light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed by the sound-light side MPU 62 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, a table setting process for setting a control table used for executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45, and the control of the display control device 70 is executed. To do. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table is set for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (hereinafter referred to as the main MPU 52). In a succeeding step S302, a command selecting process for instructing the display CPU 72 about the contents of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read in the table setting process of step S301.

Then, in step S303, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control table read in the table setting process of step S301. Further, in step S304, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control table read in the table setting process of step S301. After that, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the information indicating which is the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the game time this time, The specified information is written in the RAM 64.

After that, the advance notice lottery process is executed on condition that the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the change display time corresponding to the situation in which the notice effect can be generated (step S403: YES). (Step S404). In the notice lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not the notice effect is performed on the symbol display device 41 in the current game time. As the notice effect, as already described, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display device 41, or a part of the symbols is displayed. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, which is a symbol column, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and a background screen up to that mode Include those having different predetermined modes, and those having the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as predetermined modes different from the previous modes. The advance notice effect may occur at any game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability. In addition, the notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the out-of-range results, and has a lower appearance rate in the game times corresponding to the jackpot results. Is set to easily occur.

In the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table T1 stored in advance in the ROM 63 of the voice emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound-light side ROM 63) is stored in the RAM 64 of the voice emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound-light side RAM 64). read out. The advance notice lottery table T1 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Therefore, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table T1 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main MPU 52 is read from the sound/light side ROM 63.

FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the notice lottery table T1. The notice lottery table T1 is associated with the notice lottery results and the numerical range of the notice lottery counter. As the result of the preliminary announcement lottery, non-occurrence of no preliminary announcement effect, a first preliminary announcement effect in which the preliminary announcement effect is executed in the first mode, and a second preliminary announcement effect in which the preliminary announcement effect is executed in the second mode are set. .. In the first notice effect, for example, the individual image for the first notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined mode, and in the second notice effect, for example, the individual image for the second notice effect is in the predetermined mode. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate. The advance notice lottery counter is provided in the sound-light side RAM 64. The advance notice lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", and is incremented by "1" at regular intervals (for example, 4 msec), and becomes "0" when the maximum value is reached. Return. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the notice lottery table T1, a value that can be taken by the notice lottery counter is assigned to one of the notice lottery results.

It should be noted that the type of the announcement effect targeted for the lottery may be different depending on the type of the announcement lottery table T1. In this case, although different types of advance notice lottery tables T1 have the same type of advance notice subject to lottery but different advance notice production selection rates, different types of advance notice lottery tables T1 may be used. In some cases, some or all of the types of notice productions targeted for lottery may differ.

In the advance notice lottery processing, the value of the advance notice lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the obtained value is collated with the advance notice lottery table T1 read this time. Then, the notice lottery result corresponding to the value obtained from the notice lottery counter is obtained as the result of the notice lottery process this time.

Returning to the explanation of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if the negative determination is made in step S403 or if the process of step S404 is executed, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is reached. Reach production lottery processing is executed (step S406) on condition that the variable display time corresponds to the production of production (step S405: YES). That is, when the variation display time of the game times determined by the main MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process determines the type of the reach effect to be executed, and the main MPU 52 If the variation display time of the game times determined in No corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

In the reach effect, as already described, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the symbol columns displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is dealt with. It includes a display state in which a reach symbol combination in which a combination of the jackpot symbols that has been achieved may be established, and in which state a variable display of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol columns. Further, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the reach display is performed by displaying the variable symbols in the remaining symbol columns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. , A combination of reach patterns is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to provide a reach effect. The reach effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the out-of-range results. It is set to easily occur.

In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 63 is read into the sound-light side RAM 64. The reach lottery table T2 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Therefore, in the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main MPU 52 is read from the sound-light side ROM 63.

FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach lottery table T2. In the reach lottery table T2, the reach lottery result and the numerical range of the reach lottery counter are associated with each other. As a reach lottery result, a first reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the first aspect, a second reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the second aspect, and a third reach in which the reach effect is executed in the third aspect The production and are set. In the first reach effect, for example, an individual image for the first reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined mode, and in the second reach effect, for example, an individual image for the second reach effect is in a predetermined mode. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate, and in the third reach effect, for example, an individual image for the third reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound-light side RAM 64. The reach lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", and is incremented by "1" at regular intervals (for example, 4 msec), and becomes "0" when the maximum value is reached. Return. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the reach lottery table T2, a value that can be taken by the reach lottery counter is assigned to any of the reach lottery results.

Note that the type of reach effect targeted for the lottery may differ depending on the type of the reach lottery table T2. In this case, different types of reach lottery tables T2 may have the same type of reach production subject to the lottery, but different reach production selection rates, or different types of reach lottery tables T2. In some cases, some or all of the types of reach effects targeted for lottery may differ.

In the reach production lottery process, the value of the reach lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the obtained value is collated with the reach lottery table T2 read this time. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value obtained from the reach lottery counter is obtained as the result of the reach production lottery process this time.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S405, or if the process of step S406 is executed, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The determined information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R certainty variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R certainty variation jackpot result. The effective lines L1 to L5 in which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, the same combination of odd symbols may be selected even in the case of a normal jackpot result.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result, it is the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. The information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3.4.1”) is established on L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game is a deviation result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the content of the combination of the variation command and the type command. When the reach effect is generated, the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the above specific symbols are not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the stop result is one or two activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result for which the reach symbol combination is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, the combination of the same symbol and the above-mentioned specific symbol on all the activated lines L1 to L5 are a stop result, and the reach is reached on all the activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

Then, the control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the setting process of the control pattern table, the result of the advance notice lottery process (step S404), the presence or absence of the reach effect, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406) when the reach effect occurs, and the stop symbol determination process ( The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the sound-light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound-light side RAM 64.

The control pattern table T3 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a control pattern table T3 that can be set when the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the game times that result in the 15R certainty variation jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the control pattern table T3, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game time is set, and information on the content of the task is associated with each pointer information. And the information about the presence or absence of command output are set.

The information on the content of the task is information set for performing the light emission control and the sound output control corresponding to the current game time, and the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed in each frame in a mode according to the information on the task content. At the same time as the control, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed. Regarding the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, specifically, the data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "200". , "300" pointer information is set to data at the end of notice production, "400" pointer information is set to data at the start of normal reach, and pointer information "700" is set to data at the start of super reach. Data is set, the data at the time of starting the finalized effect is set in the pointer information of “1000”, and the data at the time of starting the standby display is set in the pointer information of “1400”. Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings is set.

The information regarding the presence/absence of command output is information indicating the presence/absence of command output from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, and the type of the command. By the command output to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the content of the image in the symbol display device 41 and the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 are performed. It is possible to associate the content with the sound output content of the speaker unit 45. That is, according to the content of the moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 44 performs the light effect and the speaker unit 45 performs the sound output effect. Regarding the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, specifically, command data is set for pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of fluctuation is set in the content of the task. Therefore, at the start of the variation of the game times, the display CPU 72 starts the display control based on the command transmission from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. In addition, in the contents of the task, each pointer information in which the data at the start of the notice production, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the fixed production, and the data at the start of the standby display are set, respectively. Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of "200", "400", "700", "1000", "1400". Therefore, within the range of the effect for the game time, which is started by the occurrence of a predetermined start timing that the command for change and the type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 52, the effect classification of the effect category included in the effect for the game time When the type changes, the display control corresponding to the new effect classification is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

Note that the control pattern table T3 is, in addition to the effect for game play, an effect for opening/closing execution mode, and an effect for demonstration display in a situation where neither the effect for game time nor the effect for opening/closing execution mode is executed. It is provided corresponding to. Since the control pattern table T3 is set corresponding to various situations in this way, some control pattern table T3 is read to the sound light side RAM 64 in a situation in which operating power is supplied to the sound light side MPU 62. It is in a state of being

After that, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S409). In the processing, the information of the variation display time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the information of the identified variation display time is described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the variable time counter 64a provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set. The variable time counter 64a is a counter for specifying the timing at which the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is ended and the fixed display of the symbol is started in the sound-light side MPU 62 in the current game time. The value set in the variable time counter 64a is decremented by 1 each time the sound interrupt MPU 62 starts the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

A variation display mode of symbols in the case where the effect for game use is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b). FIG. 13( a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the symbols are displayed in swing on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 13( b) describes how the symbols are fixedly displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG.

Game times that result in complete disengagement (game times that result in disengagement without any reach effect) or normal reach display (reach effect using the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without the reach effect character being displayed) In the game times in which (display contents to be performed) are performed, the variable display of the symbols of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started in the high speed variable display which is a low identification mode, and then each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is in a predetermined order. While switching to the low speed variable display which is a high identification mode, the standby display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the state in which the standby display is performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is continued for a predetermined period, each of the symbols displayed in the standby state is fixedly displayed as the final stop display, and the fixed display state is fixedly displayed. Continued over time.

The standby display is, as shown in FIG. 13A, a standby area SA1 that is virtually set to be three in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. It is a display state in which a symbol is waiting at SA9. In the state where only the upper symbol row Z1 becomes the standby display and the scroll display of the symbols is continued in the remaining symbol rows Z2 and Z3, one symbol each waits in the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. It will be in the state of doing. Further, in the state where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are in the standby display and the scroll display of the symbols is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, the standby areas SA1 to SA3 and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. The symbols are waiting one by one in the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to. In addition, in the state where all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in standby mode, one symbol is in standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are not displayed statically but are variably displayed within the same standby area SA1 to SA9. Specifically, each symbol that is the target of the standby display is a range that includes the stop position in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9, and shakes up and down or left and right within the range sandwiching the stop position. Move.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the fixed display means that each one of the symbols that have been standby-displayed in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has a corresponding standby area SA1 to SA9. This is a display state in which the variable display within the range is finished and the corresponding symbols are stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the respective standby areas SA1 to SA9. By performing the confirmation display in this way, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize the stop result of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 of the current game.

On the other hand, in the game times in which the super reach display is performed, the variable display of the symbols is started, and the symbols in the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3, which are some symbol columns, are in the respective standby areas SA1 to SA3 and SA7 to SA9. The image for super-reach is displayed after the standby line is displayed on the screen and the reach line is formed. After that, in the state where the combination of the jackpot symbols or the combination of the out-reach symbols is formed, the symbols are displayed in standby in the respective standby areas on all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 for a predetermined period. Then, those symbols are fixedly displayed, and the state of the fixed display is continued for the fixed display time.

Returning to the explanation of the table setting process (FIG. 10), it is a situation where the execution control of the effect is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), and in step S409, the sound-light side is performed. When the value of the variable time counter 64a of the RAM 64 is “0” (step S411: YES), the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is displayed on the fixed time counter 64b provided in the sound-light side RAM 64. ) Information is set (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter 64b is decremented by 1 each time the sound interrupt MPU 62 starts the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), that is, every time 4 msec elapses. Further, the final display table for determining the mode of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 during the final display time is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64 (step S413). Control data for executing light emission control and sound output control for the fixed display time is set in the fixed display table, but in reality, the display light emitting unit 44 is turned off during the fixed display time, and the speaker is turned off. The part 45 is in the mute state. Then, the confirmation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S414). As a result, in the display CPU 72, the symbols that are displayed in standby on the symbol display device 41 are fixedly displayed as they are, and the state of the fixed display is maintained for the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). Display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed as described above.

Here, in the main MPU 52, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command has elapsed, the special figure display unit 37a corresponds to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process of the current game time. The stop result is displayed, and the state is maintained for the fixed display time. The fluctuation display time measured by the main MPU 52 is the same as the fluctuation display time set in step S409 in the sound/light MPU 62, and the finalized display time measured by the main MPU 52 is in the sound/light MPU 62. It is the same as the confirmed display time set in step S412. Therefore, the fixed display of the symbol is started on the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the passage of the variable display time is confirmed by the main side MPU 52, and the symbol display device at the timing when the passage of the confirmed display time is confirmed by the main side MPU 52. At 41, the fixed display of the symbol ends.

In the table setting process, in addition to the processes described above, other processes are executed in step S415. In other processing, for example, when the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the open/close execution mode is read, and when the ending command is received from the main MPU 52. Executes a process for ending the effect for the open/close execution mode. Further, in a situation where neither the game turning effect nor the opening/closing execution mode effect is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demo display effect is read.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the notice light lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence/absence and the content of the notice effect is performed by the sound-light side MPU 62 and the reach effect lottery for determining the content of the reach effect. The process (step S406) is executed. As a result, it is not necessary for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence or absence and content of the notice effect, and it is not necessary to determine the content of the reach effect, so the processing load of the main MPU 52 for execution control of the effect for game play is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

However, due to the fact that both the notice effect and the reach effect are determined by the sound/light side MPU 62 by lottery, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected by the sound/light side MPU 62 is set in the main side MPU 52. It may happen that the variable display time determined by the above does not match. That is, when trying to execute the lottery for the notice effect and the lottery for the reach effect while completely matching the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52 is made to correspond to each variation display time. Therefore, it becomes necessary to prepare a plurality of types of advance notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the types of notice production and reach production become enormous. In addition, even if a plurality of types of notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects are prepared at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 in correspondence with each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52, the main MPU 52 If the lottery for the notice effect and the lottery for the reach effect are to be executed while completely matching the determined variable display time, there will be restrictions on the design of the notice effect and the reach effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, while allowing the fluctuation display time determined by the control pattern table T3 not to coincide with the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the pachinko machine 10 stands by at the end of the effect for game play. The display and confirmation display are well configured. The configuration will be described below.

14A and 14B show various parts tables T4 to T4 used when the control pattern table T3 is set in the control pattern table setting process (step S408) in the table setting process (FIG. 10). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating T9.

The parts tables T4 to T9 are tables for generating a part or all of one control pattern table T3, and are stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 63. The parts tables T4 to T9 are classified into a plurality of table groups, and one part table read from one table group may be used as it is as one control pattern table T3, or from each table group. There is a case where one control pattern table T3 is generated by combining the read out parts tables.

As the table group, there are a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period. In the table group TG1 for the first period, when the variable display of symbols is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 in the game time effect. In the case where the parts table corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the standby display in the lower symbol row Z3, and the switching for the standby display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the same time in the game turn production A parts table corresponding to the entire period of the production for the game use is included. When the notice effect is executed as the game-use effect, the control data for executing the notice effect is set in the parts tables T5 and T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, the control data for executing the first notice effect is set in the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and the control data for executing the second notice effect is set in the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. It is set. Further, the control data corresponding to the period until the standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3 of the game time when the notice effect is not generated is set in the parts table T4 for not generating the notice effect. The table group TG1 for the first period includes part tables other than the part tables T4 to T6 illustrated above.

In the table group TG2 for the second period, in the case of the game turning effect, in the case where the variable display of the symbols is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. The part table corresponding to the period from the start of the standby display in the lower symbol row Z3 to the end of the standby display in the middle symbol row Z2 is included. When the reach effect is executed as the effect for game play, the control data for executing the reach effect is set in the parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, the control data for executing the first reach effect is set in the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and the control data for executing the second reach effect is in the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. The control data for executing the third reach effect is set in the parts table T9 for the third reach effect. The table group TG2 for the second period also includes part tables other than the above-illustrated part tables T7 to T9. The parts table also includes a parts table when the reach effect is not executed.

In the control pattern table setting process in step S408 of the table setting process (FIG. 10), one part table is read from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound-light side ROM 63. In this case, for example, this is a game time that is started when the number of times of holding information stored in the holding storage area 54b is four, which is a game time that results in a deviation. When the variable display time of the game times corresponds to the variable display time in which the scroll display of the variable display of the symbols to the standby display simultaneously occurs in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the table for the first period One part table read out from the group TG1 is set as it is as the control pattern table T3.

On the other hand, when the variation display time of this game time corresponds to the variation display time in which the variation display of the symbols to the standby display sequentially occurs in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the advance notice lottery process (step One part table corresponding to the result of S404) is read from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound-light side ROM 63. If the reach effect does not occur, the one part table corresponding to the current variation display time is read out from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound-light side ROM 63, and the reach effect occurs. In that case, one part table corresponding to the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S405) is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound-light side ROM 63. Then, by combining the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period and the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period, one control pattern table T3 is set.

In the situation where one part table is set as it is as one control pattern table T3, the type of the control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in the situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are a plurality of types of the control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. Will exist. For example, the notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach effect lottery process is performed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B. In the situation where (step S406) is executed, the part table T4 for not generating the notice effect, the part table T5 for the first notice effect, and the part for the second notice effect are selected from the table group TG1 for the first period. One of the tables T6 is selected, and a part table T7 for the first reach effect, a part table T8 for the second reach effect, and a part table T9 for the third reach effect are selected from the table group TG2 for the second period. Either is selected.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display time determined by the parts tables T4 to T9. FIG. 15(a1) shows the variable display time defined by the parts table T4 for not producing the notice production, and FIG. 15(a2) shows the variation display time defined by the parts table T5 for the first notice production. (A3) shows the variable display time defined by the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. Further, FIG. 15(b1) shows the variable display time defined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and FIG. 15(b2) shows the variable display time defined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. FIG. 15B3 shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a1) to 15(a3), the variation display time determined by the first notice production parts table T5 is longer than the variation display time determined by the notice production non-occurrence parts table T4. It is longer by (Ta1), and the variable display time determined by the second notice production parts table T6 is longer by (Ta2-Ta1) than the variable display time determined by the first notice production parts table T5. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15(b1) to 15(b3), the variation display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect is more than the variation display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect. Is longer by the time (Tb1), and the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is longer by the time (Tb2-Tb1) than the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect.

In the above configuration, the notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach effect lottery is made using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B. When the process (step S406) is executed, the variable display time set by the control pattern table changes depending on the combination of the parts tables T4 to T9 to be used. Specifically, when the combination of the parts table T4 for not generating the notice effect and the part table T7 for the first reach effect is selected, the variable display time becomes the shortest, and the part table T6 for the second notice effect becomes The variation display time is the longest when the combination with the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is selected, but the difference between these variation display times is (Ta2+Tb2). Therefore, the fluctuation display time determined by the sound-light side MPU 62 may be different for one fluctuation command transmitted from the main side MPU 52.

However, the longest variation display time of the variation display times that can be selected for one variation command is less than or equal to the variation display time corresponding to the variation command, that is, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52. As described above, the notice lottery table T1 and the reach lottery table T2 that are selected for the combination of the variation command and the type command are set. That is, regardless of which advance notice lottery table T1 is used and which reach lottery table T2 is used, it corresponds to the control pattern table created by combining a plurality of parts tables. The fluctuation display time is less than or equal to the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52.

In the configuration in which the longest fluctuation display time among the fluctuation display times that can be selected for one fluctuation command is equal to or less than the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the fluctuation time counter of the sound-light side RAM 64. The control corresponding to the final pointer set in the control pattern table ends before the variable display time measured by using 64a elapses. On the other hand, if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned. The standby display is configured to continue. A process for returning the value of the pointer will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the pointer update processing, 1 is added to the value of the pointer information to be referenced among the pointer information used when specifying the control data to be used in the currently set control table (eg control pattern table). (Step S501). As a result, the value of the pointer information updated this time is used in the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303), and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next processing of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The corresponding control data is used.

Then, on condition that the value of the pointer information to be referenced is larger than the value of the final pointer defined in the control table, and the currently set control table is the game pattern control pattern table. (Steps S502 and S503: YES), pointer information correction processing is executed (step S504). In the pointer information correction processing, the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display is started includes the command selection processing (step S302) and the light emission control processing (step S302) in the next processing time of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). The value of the pointer information to be referred to is corrected so that it is used in step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304). As a result, even if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the standby display continues until the variable display time elapses. It will be.

When the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed, the standby extension command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When the display CPU 72 receives the standby extension command, the display CPU 72 sets the data table for allowing the standby display to continue, and allows the symbol display device 41 to continue the standby display.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 17, the manner in which the game diverting effect is executed will be described. FIG. 17(a) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 17(b1) and FIG. 17(b2) show the execution control of the effect using the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period. 17(c1) and 17(c2) are periods in which execution control of production using the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period is performed. 17(d1) and 17(d2) show the standby display period, and FIGS. 17(e1) and 17(e2) show the confirmed display period. 17(b1), 17(c1), 17(d1) and 17(e1), the notice lottery process (step S404) is performed by using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a). A control pattern table (hereinafter, the shortest correspondence table) that is executed and has the shortest variation display time when the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed by using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B. 17(b2), FIG. 17(c2), FIG. 17(d2) and FIG. 17(e2) using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a). When the advance lottery process (step S404) is executed and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed by using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. The case where a pattern table (hereinafter referred to as the longest correspondence table) is used is shown.

Regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, at the timing of t1, the game time is started as shown in FIG. ) And as shown in FIG. 17(b2), the first period starts. Then, when the shortest correspondence table is used, at the timing of t11, the first period ends and the second period starts as shown in FIGS. 17(b1) and 17(c1), and the longest correspondence table is set. When used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing of t21 as shown in FIGS. 17(b2) and 17(c2).

After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, at the timing of t12, the second period ends and the standby display period starts as shown in FIGS. 17(c1) and 17(d1), and the longest correspondence table is set. When used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at the timing of t22 as shown in FIGS. 17(c2) and 17(d2). In this case, in the situation where the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of the standby display defined in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapsed timing of the variable display time, but the pointer update processing (FIG. 16) By executing the pointer information correction process (step S504) at, the standby display is continued.

After that, regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, the fluctuation measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a of the sound-light side RAM 64 at the timing of t2. The display time elapses. Therefore, if the shortest correspondence table is used, as shown in FIGS. 17D1 and 17E1, the standby display period ends and the confirmed display period starts, and the longest correspondence table is used. In that case, as shown in FIGS. 17(d2) and 17(e2), the standby display period ends and the confirmed display period starts. When the confirmed display time elapses at the timing of t3, the confirmed display period ends as shown in FIG. 17(e1) and FIG. 17(e2), and the current game time as shown in FIG. 17(a). Ends.

As described above, the light side MPU 62 executes the notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence and the content of the notice effect and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) for determining the content of the reach effect. To be executed. As a result, it is not necessary for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence or absence of the notice effect and the content of the reach effect, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 52 regarding the execution control of the game use effect. Is planned. Further, it is possible to diversify the effect mode set for one combination of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

Corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery process and the result of the reach effect lottery process so that the variation display time determined by the control pattern table may be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52. The control pattern table is set. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 52 and diversify the effect mode, while appropriately designing the notice effect and the reach effect.

Even with a configuration in which the variable display times determined by the control pattern table selected with the same variation command as a trigger may be different, the symbol display device is at a timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. The mode of variable display of symbols in 41 is switched from the standby display to the final display. Thereby, even if the variable display time determined by the control pattern table may be different, the effect for game use in the symbol display device 41 is ended at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. It becomes possible.

Even in the case where the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, in the configuration in which the control pattern tables to be used may be different, the longest variation display among the variation display times determined by those control pattern tables The time corresponds to the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52 or less. Then, when the control pattern table corresponding to the variable display time that is shorter than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is used, until the timing when the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 elapses. The variable display mode of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is maintained in the standby display. As a result, whichever control pattern table is the target of use, switching from the standby display to the confirmed display occurs at the symbol display device 41 at the end of the game time, for example, a predetermined effect. It is possible to prevent an event that the confirmed display is suddenly started in the middle of, or an event that the confirmed display of the symbol continues for a period longer than the normal confirmed display period.

The sound/light side RAM 64 is provided with a fluctuation time counter 64a, and the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received from the main MPU 52 is set in the fluctuation time counter 64a, and the fluctuation time counter 64a is also set. When the variable display time being used and measured has elapsed, the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is switched to the fixed display. As a result, even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, in the configuration in which the variable display times defined by the control pattern table may differ, the command indicating the start timing of the final display is issued to the main MPU 52. It is possible to start the confirmation display at a timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 without transmitting the confirmation display.

It should be noted that the following configuration may be applied as a configuration in which the variation display time determined by the control pattern table may be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52.

-Various parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period are controlled by the amount corresponding to a time longer than the longest variable display time assumed as a situation in which these parts tables T7 to T9 are used. The data may be set, and the control data for executing the standby display may be set as the control data corresponding to the rear period following the end timing. In this case, there is no need to execute the correction process for extending the execution period of the standby display for the control pattern table. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the variation display time of the game times has elapsed.

-The control pattern table for controlling the execution of effects after the standby display is started is provided separately from the control pattern table for controlling the execution of effects before the start of the standby display. When it is performed, it may be configured to switch to a state in which execution control of production is performed based on the control pattern table for standby display. In this case, by using the same control pattern table for standby display at any game time, the control pattern table for standby display can be used in various situations. In the configuration, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table for performing standby display for a predetermined period, and it is necessary to perform standby display for a period longer than the predetermined period. Alternatively, the control pattern table for standby display may be used in a loop. In addition, the control pattern table for the standby display is set as a table that allows the standby display to be executed over the longest period assumed as the period in which the standby display is executed. When the time has elapsed, the use of the control pattern table for standby display may be terminated halfway.

The measurement of the time for starting the fixed display is not limited to the configuration in which the sound-light side MPU 62 is executed, and when the timing for starting the fixed display is reached, the main-side MPU 52 causes the sound-light side MPU 62 to start. The command corresponding to that is transmitted, and when the command is received by the sound-light side MPU 62, the process for starting the confirmation display in the sound-light side MPU 62 may be executed.

Even in the case where the same fluctuation command is received from the main MPU 52, in the configuration in which the control pattern tables to be used may be different, the longest fluctuation among the fluctuation display times determined by the control pattern tables. Instead of the configuration in which the display time is less than or equal to the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the longest fluctuation display time among the fluctuation display times determined by the control pattern table is the fluctuation determined by the main MPU 52. The configuration may be such that the time may be longer than the display time. In this case, it is necessary to end the effect during the execution of the game repurpose. Therefore, in such a case, an effect for forced termination is generated, and the content corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and type lottery of the corresponding game times in the forced termination effect, more specifically, the game. The contents corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the table setting process (FIG. 10) of the number of times may be notified. More specifically, even when the production such as the reach production corresponding to the period before the standby display is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the variation of the variation display time has elapsed The symbol combination determined as the stop result may be suddenly stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display may be performed in a state where the symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, the processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 in a predetermined cycle, specifically, in a cycle of 20 msec.

When outputting the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner portion of the display surface P, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the aligned dots, and the image signal is sequentially output to the dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs the V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of the V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of the image for one frame. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt processing, first, command analysis processing is executed (step S601). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives the strobe signal from the sound-light side MPU 62, the display CPU 72 executes the command interrupt process regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interruption process, the command received at the input port 77 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 73.

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S602: YES), the command corresponding process is executed (step S603). In the command handling process, the execution target table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74. The execution target table defines the processing required to display an image for one frame at each image update timing when a moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information.

The commands that the display CPU 72 receives from the sound-light side MPU 62 are the commands at the start of fluctuation, the commands at the start of notice production, the commands at the start of normal reach, the commands at the start of super reach, and the commands at the start of final production, which have already been described. There are commands for starting standby display, standby extension commands, fixed display start commands, and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effect for game play corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 41 is read.

When a negative determination is made in step S602, or when the processing of step S603 is executed, task processing is executed (step S604). In the task processing, by referring to the control data of this processing time in the execution target table set as the usage target, a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 76 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time. Set various data required for the operation. As the various data, specifically, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is stored in the memory module 74, the address information of the area to which the image data of the control target is transferred in the VRAM 75, and the image data of the control target are used. Information of the target frame areas 82a and 82b for which drawing data should be created, coordinate information when writing the control target image data in the creation target frame areas 82a and 82b, and scale information when writing the image data, Further, there is information about a uniform α value (semitransparent value) when writing the image data.

After that, the drawing list output process is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 76 will be described later in detail.

The task process of step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S701). In the control start setting process, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current process. If it exists, the work RAM 73 is searched for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. To secure a free buffer area. Further, the initialization processing is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the control start parameter information corresponding to the individual image is set in the initialized free buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S702). This control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in one frame of images after the current processing.

After that, the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S703). In the background calculation processing, the control update target of this time is grasped from the still image for the backmost and the background sprite that will form the background image. Further, with respect to the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation on the virtual two-dimensional plane is calculated and derived. Then, the various parameter information thus derived is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

After that, the production calculation process is executed (step S704). In the effect calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped from the effect sprites that form the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach effect, notice effect, and jackpot effect. Further, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the various parameter information thus derived is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

Then, the symbol calculation process is executed (step S705). In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner in each game. Further, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the various parameter information thus derived is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

After that, the process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed (step S706). In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, one frame of image corresponding to the drawing data creation instruction of this time is selected from among the individual images subject to the control update by the calculation processes of step S703, step S704, and step S705. A process of grasping the included individual image is executed. The grasping is performed by referring to the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale of various individual images, and executing a predetermined calculation. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, it is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by setting only the individual images to be displayed as the individual images specified in the drawing list, not all the individual images for which control has been started. There is no need to uselessly perform drawing processing for individual images that are not display targets even if they are not sorted. As a result, the processing load on the VDP 76 can be reduced.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

In the VDP 76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, And the process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72. The process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the content of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information is information indicating which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b the drawing data for displaying the image of one frame corresponding to the drawing list is stored in the target buffer. Information is set. Further, in the header information, the presence/absence of decoding designation and the information of the address of the moving image data to be decoded are set.

In the drawing list, in addition to the above-mentioned header information, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set. Parameter information and are set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number information, and the information of the image data to be used is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each number information. Further, the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set such that the individual image to be displayed is positioned so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame, and the individual image is to be drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written into the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b, and then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written. In the image for one frame, the individual images are displayed in the order of background image→effect image→design.

Plural kinds of parameters are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),.... As to the parameter P(1) of the background data, specifically, as shown in FIG. 20B, the address information of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area to which the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating a position on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, rotation angle information indicating a rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and background data. With respect to the size set as the initial state of, the uniform α value indicating the scale information indicating the magnification when writing in the frame areas 82a and 82b, and the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing the background data. Information and information for specifying α data indicating whether or not to apply α data and an application target are set. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG.

The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels forming the image data, but the coordinate information for one image data is set. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is designated. The VDP 76 can recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, the one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinate. .. As a result, the information capacity (that is, the data amount) of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be a pixel having a corner angle such as an upper left corner or an upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as rectangular shapes, by using the corner pixels as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in the memory module 74 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

In the situation where the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of the background data and the sprite data may be uniformly controlled for all pixels instead of being finely controlled in pixel units. Since it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with uniform α values, it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is completed. If the drawing data has been created, it is determined in step S802 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S803, a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed.

In the correspondence process at the time of reception, it is grasped from which information of the target buffer included in the drawing list which frame area 82a, 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn.

In a succeeding step S804, a content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the read target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S804, the image data of the drawing target this time is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b set as the generation targets.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the drawing data designated by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S806. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S804 and S805 is performed on the switched image data. That is, the drawing data of one frame specified by one drawing list is created by executing the drawing process multiple times.

It is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a plurality of image data may be processed in one drawing process. It is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be adopted.

When a negative determination is made in step S802 or after the processing of step S805 is performed, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the image signal output for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it is not completed, the main drawing process is ended as it is, and if it is completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S808, and then the main drawing process is ended.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing that is one frame later for the corresponding frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. In the above, the frame areas 82a and 82b which are the drawing targets of the drawing data are regulated so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signals.

<Configuration for sharing execution target table>
Next, a configuration for sharing the execution target table will be described.

In this pachinko machine 10, variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 set in the symbol display device 41 at each game time (see FIG. 4(a)). The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a plurality of rows such as an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and no numbers are attached between the respective main symbols. Sub-patterns are arranged one by one. Then, when the game time is started, from the display mode of the symbols finally stopped and displayed in the previous game time, scroll in a predetermined direction according to the arrangement order of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The variable display of the symbols is performed. After that, the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the symbols finally stopped and displayed in each game time may be different, the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when the game time is started may be different. ..

An example of the variable display mode of symbols will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22A shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 22B shows the acceleration period in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 22C shows the high-speed period in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22(d) shows a low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22(e) shows a low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3, and FIG. 22(f) shows a low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2.

At the timing of t1, the game time is started as shown in FIG. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 22(b), moving image display is performed such that the variable display speed of the symbols gradually increases in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The variable display speed in this case is a variable display speed with which the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 can be identified or can be easily identified. Due to the existence of the acceleration period in this way, it becomes possible to set the start mode when the variable display of the symbols is started in each game time to a constant mode, and the player is notified that the game time is started. Can be easily recognized.

After that, at the timing of t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22(b), and as shown in FIG. 22(c), it becomes a high-speed period in which variable display is performed at high speed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the high-speed period, the variable display speed of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 becomes the variable display speed in which the type of symbol cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. The type of symbols displayed on the display surface P is adjusted during the high speed period. Thereby, in the configuration in which the stop result of the current game time is determined irrespective of the type of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game time, with respect to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 Thus, it is possible to adjust the types of symbols displayed in the standby display and the still display in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Then, at the timing of t3, the variable display speed of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high speed to the low speed as shown in FIG. 22(d). When the low-speed display is performed, the variable display of the symbols is performed at a variable display speed that can identify or easily identify the type of the symbols. In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3.

Then, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22(d), the low-speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, so that the scroll display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 ends and the standby display starts. Further, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the variable display speed of symbols in the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from high speed to low speed. In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the lower symbol row Z3, high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, and standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1.

After that, as shown in the timing chart 22(e) of timing t5, the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 is ended, so that the scroll display of symbols is ended and the standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3. Further, at the timing of t5, the variable display speed of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from high speed to low speed as shown in FIG. In this case, the low speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 22(f), the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 ends, so that in the middle symbol row Z2, the scroll display of the symbols ends and the standby display starts. In this case, the standby display is performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and then the stationary display is performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

In the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the execution target table stored in advance in the memory module 74 is read, and the display CPU 72 determines the type of the symbols to be displayed on the display surface P according to the execution target table. At the same time, various parameters such as the arrangement position of the symbols to be displayed are determined. Here, the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of each game time, and the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the end of each game time are: It may be different for each game. For example, the variable display of symbols may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or the variable display of symbols may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(b). There is also. Further, for example, the game time may end in a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or the game time may end in a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(b). In this case, if an execution target table is to be prepared in advance according to each pattern, it is necessary to prepare the execution target table in correspondence with each of the possible stop display modes at the start of the variable display of the game times. In addition to the occurrence, it is necessary to prepare the execution target table in correspondence with each of the possible stop display modes at the end of the game game. Then, the types of execution target tables become extremely large, and the storage capacity required to store the execution target tables in advance increases.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the variation display of the game time, and the common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game time. It is configured to use the execution target table. The common execution target table will be described.

The execution target table is provided for each of the acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period. In this case, for the acceleration period, the execution target table is provided so as to be common to all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the high-speed period and the low-speed period are not commonly provided between the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In addition, the execution target table is whether the reach effect is generated or not for the acceleration period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the high speed period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, and the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3. It is used regardless, but is used only when the reach effect does not occur for the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2. When the reach effect occurs, the common execution target table is not used for the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2, but the dedicated execution target table corresponding to each reach effect is used.

The execution target table is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In detail, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 24A, the memory module 74 has an acceleration table in which an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols of all symbol strings Z1 to Z3 during the acceleration period is stored in advance. Period storage area 101, first high-speed period storage area 102 in which an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 in the high-speed period is stored in advance, and upper symbol row Z1 in the low-speed period A first low-speed period storage area 103 in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols is stored in advance, and an execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 in the high speed period are stored in advance. The second high-speed period storage area 104, the second low-speed period storage area 105 in which the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 in the low-speed period is stored in advance, and the high-speed period A third high-speed period storage area 106 in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol sequence Z3 is stored in advance, and an execution for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol sequence Z3 in the low-speed period. A third low-speed period storage area 107 in which a target table is stored in advance is provided.

The acceleration period, the high-speed period, and the low-speed period are not constant in relation to the variation display time of the game time, and there are a plurality of types such that there are long and short periods. In this case, the execution period table for the acceleration period stored in the acceleration period storage area 101 is only one type, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution period table for the acceleration period is the variation display time of the game time. The acceleration period is longer than the longest acceleration period among the multiple types of acceleration periods defined in relation to. Thereby, even if any type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the variation display time of the game times, it is possible to use the execution target table for that one type of acceleration period.

Only one type of execution target table for the high speed period is stored in each of the first high speed period storage area 102, the second high speed period storage area 104, and the third high speed period storage area 106. The high-speed period controllable by the execution target table for the first high-speed period stored in the first high-speed period storage area 102 is a plurality of types of the upper symbol row Z1 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game times. It is longer than the longest high-speed period in the high-speed period. Further, the high-speed period controllable by the execution target table for the second high-speed period stored in the second high-speed period storage area 104 is a plurality of middle symbol strings Z2 determined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. It is longer than the longest high-speed period of the types of high-speed periods. Further, the high-speed period controllable by the execution target table for the third high-speed period stored in the third high-speed period storage area 106 is a plurality of lower symbol rows Z3 determined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. It is longer than the longest high-speed period of the types of high-speed periods. As a result, even if any type of high-speed period is selected in relation to the variable display time of the game times in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, one type of high-speed period is executed for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It becomes possible to use the target table.

A plurality of low-speed period execution target tables are stored in each of the first low-speed period storage area 103, the second low-speed period storage area 105, and the third low-speed period storage area 107. That is, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low speed period are stored in the first low speed period storage area 103 so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, and the second low speed period is stored. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the second low speed period are stored in the period storage area 105 so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2, and the third low speed period storage area 107. In, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the third low speed period are stored in a one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low speed period of the lower symbol sequence Z3. In this way, the execution target table for the low-speed period is prepared for each type of low-speed period, so that the variable display of symbols is controlled by using the execution-target table for the low-speed period, and each low-speed period is supported. It becomes possible to execute the standby display of the symbol and the static display of the symbol at the timing.

25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, which is stored in advance in the acceleration period storage area 101, and FIG. 25B is the first high speed period storage area 102. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period stored in advance in FIG. 26, and FIG. 26 is the execution target table for the first low speed period stored in the first low speed period storage area 103 in advance. It is an explanatory view for explaining target table T12. The execution target table for the second high-speed period and the execution target table for the third high-speed period are different from the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period in the maximum value of the pointer information, but the other points are the first. This is the same as the execution target table T11 for the high speed period. Further, an execution target table of a different type from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period stored in the first low speed period storage area 103, an execution target table for the second low speed period, and a third low speed period. The execution target table differs from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period in the maximum value of the pointer information, but is otherwise the same as the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period.

As shown in FIGS. 25A, 25B, and 26, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12, and each pointer is set. Corresponding to the information, the display pattern adjustment area and the task content information are set.

Information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Specifically, information corresponding to one symbol in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Here, three symbols are displayed simultaneously in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, but the information set in the display symbol adjustment area is the type of symbol existing at the beginning in the moving direction of the symbol. It corresponds to the information of. Further, as already described, the total number of the symbols arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is different, and specifically, the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 have a total of 18 main symbols and sub symbols. While the individual symbols are arranged, in the middle symbol row Z2, 20 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol are arranged. Therefore, when the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any of "1" to "18". The information to be set is set, and when the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol column Z2, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any of "1" to "20". Information is set.

For example, when "1" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the predetermined pointer information in the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the predetermined pointer information In the frame corresponding to, the main symbol of "1", the sub symbol between "1" and "9", and the main symbol of "9" are displayed. Further, when "2" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol, in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information, the sub symbol between "1" and "9", the main symbol of "9" , And sub-patterns between “9” and “8” are displayed.

In the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scroll-displayed as described above, but the types of symbols to be scroll-displayed are the same over a plurality of frames. Therefore, in the display symbol adjustment area, the same symbol information is set over a plurality of consecutive pointer information. Then, the information set in the adjustment area of the display symbol is changed as the value of the pointer information increases, so that the type of the symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol column Z1 to Z3 is changed.

The information on the content of the task includes coordinate information indicating the arrangement position of the symbol to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the writing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the frame buffer 82) and the size of the symbol to be used. Parameter information such as scale information indicating is set. In this case, the coordinate information is set with information that determines each arrangement position of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding frame. Therefore, the information of the coordinates corresponding to each of the three symbols to be displayed, which are specified from the information of the adjustment area of the display symbol, can be specified from the information of the content of the task. For example, when "1" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol of a plurality of consecutive pointer information in the execution target table applied to the upper symbol row Z1, information on the contents of the task corresponding to these plural pointer information is set. In, in the corresponding symbol row, the main symbol of "1", the sub symbol between "1" and "9", and the respective arrangement positions of the main symbols of "9" gradually change in the scroll display direction. Information on such coordinates is set.

In the configuration in which a plurality of symbols corresponding to the information set in the display symbol adjustment area as described above are displayed and parameter information of the plurality of symbols is set in the task content information, the display symbol adjustment area Is a rewritable area under the control of the display CPU 72 after the execution target table is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. This rewriting is performed at the timing when the use of the corresponding execution target table is started, according to the type of the symbol that is the display target in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3. Further, by scrolling the symbols, the types of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3 change with the passage of time. The switching timings of the three types of symbols to be displayed are predetermined in the respective execution target tables T10 to T12. Therefore, when the adjustment area of the display symbol is rewritten, the pointer information corresponding to the next switching timing from the first pointer information is set as one pointer group and included between the one switching timing and the next switching timing. When the pointer information is one pointer group, information of the same symbol is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to each pointer information included in the one pointer group, and different symbols are set between different pointer groups. Information is set.

Information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12 as described above, but the information set in the adjustment area of the display symbol is displayed by the display CPU 72. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24B, the work RAM 73 is provided with a first adjustment counter 111, a second adjustment counter 112, and a third adjustment counter 113 as an area for specifying in FIG. There is. The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3. ..

In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information on the type of the symbol existing at the head when the symbol moves from right to left in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is set. The display CPU 72 changes the value of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 every time the symbol existing at the head of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed to the symbol in the next order. It updates to the information of the later symbol type. As a result, the information set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 always corresponds to the type of symbol existing at the head of the corresponding symbol sequence Z1 to Z3. When the display CPU 72 starts control of variable display of symbols by a predetermined execution target table, information corresponding to the symbol type information set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is displayed in the predetermined execution target table. Set it in the design adjustment area.

When the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is started, as shown in FIG. 23(a), when the leading symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is the main symbol of "3", the value of the first adjustment counter 111 Becomes "5". Here, the relationship between the value set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of the top symbol will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. As already described, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged with a total of 18 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol, while the middle symbol column Z2 has the main symbol and the sub symbol. Since a total of 20 symbols are arranged in total, the number of types of values that can be taken by the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 is different.

In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. 27(a), while taking the values of "1" to "18", each value is an upper symbol row Z1 and a lower symbol. There is a one-to-one correspondence with a total of 18 symbols in each of the rows Z3. In this case, the odd number corresponds to the main symbol and the even number corresponds to the sub symbol. Further, in the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left, whereas in the lower symbol row Z3, the main symbols are with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. The first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 have a relationship between the values that can be taken by the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 and the type of the first symbol. And are the same.

In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27(b), while taking a value of "1" to "20", each value is paired with a total of 20 symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. 1 corresponds. In this case, the relationship between the values of “1” to “18” and the type of the first symbol is the same as that of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. Further, the value of "19" corresponds to the main symbol of "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1", and the value of "20" is concerned. It corresponds to the sub symbol between the main symbol of "4" and the main symbol of "1".

The setting mode of information for the adjustment area of the display symbol will be described by taking as an example the case of setting the variable display mode of the symbols in the acceleration period, the high speed period and the low speed period in the upper symbol row Z1. 28A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, and FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for describing the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period. In addition, the setting mode of the information for the adjustment area of the display symbol of the execution target table corresponding to each of the middle symbol column Z2 and the lower symbol column Z3, the upper symbol column Z1 is arranged in the descending order of the symbols. The symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are different in that the arrangement manner of the symbols is ascending order, but the other points are the setting manner of the information for the adjustment area of the display symbol of the execution target table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. It is the same.

When the effect for game play is started in the state shown in FIG. 23A, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “5”. Further, in the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged so that the main symbols are in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. Therefore, in the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period read from the acceleration period storage area 101 and in the display symbol adjustment area in the table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, as shown in FIG. 28(a). , "5" corresponding to the current top symbol is set for the first pointer group, and the symbol to be controlled in this case is between the main symbol "3" and "3" and "2". And the sub-pattern of "2". Also, for the pointer group in the next order, "4" corresponding to the symbol in the next order is set for the current top symbol, and the next order for the pointer group in the next order. "3" corresponding to the symbol of the next order is set for the symbol of "2", and "2" corresponding to the symbol of the next order for the symbol of the next sequence is set for the pointer group of the next sequence. Is set. That is, the numerical values are set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the numbers are arranged in descending order toward the rear pointer group.

When the control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol row Z1 by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period in which the adjustment area of the display symbol is set as described above is completed, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes "1". ing. Therefore, in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period read from the storage area 102 for the first high speed period, as shown in FIG. 28(b), for the first pointer group, "1" corresponding to the current top symbol is set, and "18" corresponding to the next sequential symbol is set to the current top symbol for the next order pointer group. .. In other words, in the upper symbol row Z1, 18 symbols are circulated while scrolling from right to left, so in the following order with respect to the pointer group in which "1" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol. "18" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the existing pointer group. Further, for the pointer group after that, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that it is a serial number and is in the descending order of the numbers.

Here, as already described, the high-speed period controllable by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is the longest of the plurality of high-speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 which is determined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the high-speed period. In this case, when it comes to the use timing of the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period, regardless of the current high-speed period, all the adjustment areas of the display symbol in the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period Although a value is set for the first high speed period, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is ended when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, and the first low speed period is ended. The control is switched to the control by the execution target table T12 for. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is ended.

The same applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. That is, as described above, the acceleration period controllable by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is the longest among the plurality of types of acceleration periods of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 determined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the acceleration period. In this case, when it comes to the use timing of the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, regardless of the current acceleration period, the value for all the adjustment areas of the display symbol in the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period Is set, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is ended when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, and the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is finished. Switch to control by. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the ending timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends.

In the case where the pointer group for which “17” is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol in FIG. 28B corresponds to the end timing of this high speed period, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “16”. Has become. Therefore, in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period read from the storage area 103 for the first low speed period, as shown in FIG. "16" corresponding to the first symbol of the symbol is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a serial number and in descending order of the numbers.

As described above, by using the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, the value of the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target tables T10 to T12 is set. Thereby, even if the execution target tables T10 to T12 are configured to be used for a plurality of types of situations, the variable display of the symbols is controlled in a mode corresponding to the type of the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. It becomes possible to do.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of symbols while also using the execution target table will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the command handling process executed by the display CPU 72. The command handling process is executed in step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When the variation start command is received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (step S901: YES), the acceleration period execution target table is read from the acceleration period storage area 101 to the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, since the execution target table for the acceleration period is read corresponding to each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the work RAM 73 has a total of three execution target tables for the acceleration period. Is read. However, the execution target tables for these three acceleration periods are of the same type.

Then, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the execution target table for the high-speed period is read from the high-speed period storage areas 102, 104, 106 to the work RAM 73 (step S903). Specifically, the execution target table for the first high-speed period corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is read from the first high-speed period storage area 102, and the second high-speed period storage area 104 corresponds to the medium symbol row Z2. The execution target table for the second high speed period is read, and the execution target table for the third high speed period corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is read from the third high speed period storage area 106.

After that, it is determined from the information of the variation display time in the current game time included in the variation start command whether or not the reach effect is generated in the current game time (step S904). When the reach effect does not occur (step S904: NO), each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 has a low-speed execution target table corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time. The data is read from the low-speed period storage areas 103, 105, 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S905). As described above, the low-speed period is set in plural types in each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, but the low-speed period corresponds to the variation display time of the game times. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time is read. Specifically, the execution target table for the first low-speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low-speed period of the current upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low-speed period storage area 103, and the second low-speed period is read. Read the execution target table for the second low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low speed period of the current middle symbol row Z2) from the storage area 105, and display the current fluctuation from the third low speed period storage area 107. The execution target table for the third low-speed period corresponding to the time (that is, the low-speed period of the current lower symbol row Z3) is read.

If the reach effect occurs (step S904: YES), the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time is stored for the first symbol line Z1 and the lower symbol line Z3 for the first low speed period. The data is read from the area 103 and the third low-speed period storage area 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S906). Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low speed period of the current upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low speed period storage area 103, and the third low speed period is read. The execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 of this time) is read from the storage area 107 for use. After that, a dedicated execution target table corresponding to the reach effect this time is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S907).

When the process of step S905 or step S907 is executed, for the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table for each acceleration period read in step S902, the information corresponding to the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is displayed. A setting process is executed (step S908). In the setting process, with respect to the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the first to the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of the adjustment counter 111 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the values are set in the adjustment area of the display symbols so that the pointer numbers are serial numbers and are in descending order. In addition, regarding the execution target table for the acceleration period that is read to control the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the second adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of 112 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the values are set in the display symbol adjustment area so that the pointer groups are serial numbers and are in ascending order of the numbers. Further, regarding the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, the third adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of 113 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the values are set in the display symbol adjustment area so that the pointer groups are serial numbers and are in ascending order of the numbers.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, or if the processing of step S908 is executed, other processing is executed (step S909). In other processes, when a command different from the command for starting fluctuation is received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed.

Next, the normal fluctuation calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal variation calculation process is executed in the symbol calculation process of step S705 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the game effect is being executed and the reach effect is not being executed. ..

First, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 is the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group in which the pointer information that is the current reference target in the execution target table that is the usage target for the upper symbol row Z1 is The case is applicable. If it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is decremented by 1 (step S1002). Then, when the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1003: YES), the maximum value "18" is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1003: YES). S1004).

In step S1005, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113. The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 is the pointer information in the last order in the pointer group in which the pointer information that is the current reference target in the execution target table that is the target of use for the middle symbol sequence Z2 is The case is applicable. The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 is the pointer information in the last order in the pointer group in which the pointer information that is the current reference target in the execution target table that is the usage target for the lower symbol sequence Z3 is The case is applicable.

When it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), 1 is added to the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated this time (step S1006). In this case, only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated, or both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated. In some cases. After that, it is determined whether or not the values of the update target adjustment counters 112 and 113 after the addition of 1 exceed the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is “20”, and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is “18”. If the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated exceed the maximum value, the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 that have exceeded the maximum value are set to the minimum value "1" (step S1008).

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a table at the switching timing among the execution target tables that are the target of use in each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. .. If the switching timing is the acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the acceleration period is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time. This is the case when it is information. Since the acceleration period is constant in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the acceleration period to the execution target table for the high speed period occurs simultaneously in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Further, if the switching timing is a high-speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high-speed period is the end timing of the high-speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is the case when it is the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to. Since the high-speed period is different in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the high-speed period to the execution target table for the low-speed period individually occurs in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

For any of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, when it is the switching timing of the execution target table (step S1009: YES), change processing of the execution target table of the use target is executed (step S1010). ). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In the change process, if the execution target table for the acceleration period is the target for use, the execution target for the high speed period that has already been read to the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command handling process (FIG. 30). When the use target is changed to the table and the execution target table for the high speed period is the use target, it is already read to the work RAM 73 in steps S905 to S907 in the command handling process (FIG. 30). Change the usage target to the execution target table.

After that, the setting process based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed for the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table newly determined to be used. The content of the setting process is as described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. As a result, the content of the execution target table newly determined to be used is changed to a mode corresponding to the current display content of the symbol.

If a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if the processing of step S1011 has been executed, pointer update processing is executed (step S1012). In the pointer update processing, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, the pointer information that is the reference target in the execution target table that is the usage target is updated to the pointer information in the next order. To do. However, the pointer information update process is not executed for the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 in which the execution target table to be used has been changed in the current processing time of the normal variation calculation process.

After that, the type of image data corresponding to the symbol to be displayed for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is grasped (step S1013). When grasping this, from the value of the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table that is the target of use in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbol column Z1 corresponding to that execution target table The type of the first symbol in Z3 is grasped, and the types of the two types of symbols that follow are grasped. Further, such a kind of symbol is grasped for all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3.

After that, various parameter information of all the symbols to be displayed this time is grasped from the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table which is the target of use in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes the coordinates of the three symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the coordinates of the three symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, and the coordinates of the three symbols in the lower symbol row Z3.

When the normal variation calculation process is executed as described above, the pattern grasped in step S1013 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). .. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information applied to those symbols is set.

As described above, since the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols is also used in various situations, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables stored in the memory module 74 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the execution target table in the memory module 74 in advance. Even if the execution target table is also used, since the type of the symbol to be displayed is adjusted by using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, it is possible to appropriately control the variable display of the symbol. It will be possible.

There is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the longest of the plurality of types of acceleration period determined in relation to the variation display time of the game time. The period is longer than the acceleration period. Then, the execution target table for the acceleration period is used regardless of the type of acceleration period, and the range of the pointer information referred to in the execution target table is changed in relation to the type of the acceleration period of the execution target. To be done. As a result, the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required to store the execution target tables in the memory module 74 in advance can be suppressed. In particular, one type of execution target table for the acceleration period is commonly used for all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

There is only one type of execution target table for the high-speed period prepared for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the high-speed period controllable by the execution target table for each high-speed period is the corresponding symbol row Z1. Z3 is a period that is equal to or longer than the longest high-speed period among a plurality of types of high-speed periods determined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. Then, for one symbol row Z1 to Z3, the execution target table for one type of high-speed period is used regardless of the type of high-speed period, and the execution target in relation to the type of high-speed period to be executed. The range of pointer information referenced in the table is changed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the execution target tables in the memory module 74 in advance.

Even if the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high speed period is suppressed to a small number as described above, the switching of the execution target tables is performed in the last order in the pointer group that is the reference target. It is performed at the timing when the control based on the pointer information is completed. With this, in the execution target table that is newly used, the control may be started from the pointer information in the first order in the one pointer group, so that the execution target table can be appropriately switched.

In each execution target table, a display symbol adjustment area is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the content of the task in each pointer information. Then, by adjusting the information set in the display symbol adjustment area, the type of symbol to which the content of each task is applied is changed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the type of the target symbol to which the information about the content of the task is applied at each update timing simply by referring to each execution target table.

Further, when the use of the execution target table is started, the information on the type of the symbol is set for each of the display symbol adjustment areas included in the execution target table. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the process for changing the information in the adjustment area of the display symbol for the execution target table during the execution of the control using the execution target table. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

<Another mode for shared use of execution target table>
-The execution target table may not have a display symbol adjustment area. In this case, the execution target table has at least the information of the trigger for switching the values of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the information of the task, so that the type of the symbol to be displayed is for adjustment. It becomes possible to grasp from the counters 111 to 113. According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the execution target table in that it is not necessary to set the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table.

-When all types of individual images are control targets during the control period using one execution target table, the type of individual image to which the execution target table is applied is always constant, but The order of individual images to be applied may be different for each game. Therefore, in this case, the type of individual image to be applied to the execution target table is not adjusted, but the order of individual images to be applied to the execution target table is adjusted.

The configuration in which the execution target table is also used as described above may be applied to the configuration in which the specific variation display is performed by using only one type of individual image among a plurality of types of individual images. In this case, in the execution target table, the information for determining the operation content of the individual image that is the execution target of the specific variation display is set in time series, and the type of the individual image that is the application target of the information is adjusted. The Rukoto.

A configuration in which the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided in common for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 May be Further, the execution target table for the high speed period may be provided so as to be commonly used for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

The switching of the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high speed period is not limited to the configuration in which the control by the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group that is the reference target is completed. Instead, it may be the timing when control by other pointer information is completed. However, it is preferable that the timing at which the switching occurs is set as the timing at which the control by the pointer information in the predetermined order in the pointer group is completed, whichever acceleration period or high speed period.

<Structure for performing loop display performance>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop display effect will be described.

32A and 32B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the loop display character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 that enable the notification of the content corresponding to the result of the hit/miss judgment in the MPU 62 of the main control device 50. At the same time, the loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In the loop display effect, the types of the symbols G1 to G3 are different from those of FIG. 4B, and the manner of variable display of symbols in a plurality of columns is also the case of FIG. 4B. Is a different mode. Specifically, three cube-shaped base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side in a lateral direction, and numerical symbols G1 to G3 are displayed on the front face of each base symbol image G6 to G8. R. Then, at the time of variable display of the symbols, the base symbol images G6 to G8 are rotated in the vertical direction about a rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the center of the base symbol images G6 to G8, and each base is accompanied by the rotation. The symbols G1 to G3 displayed in front of the symbol images G6 to G8 are changed. The trigger for changing between the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 4(b) and the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 32(a) is arbitrary, but there are, for example, a plurality of types of display modes and the first display mode. The display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 4(b) may be used, and the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 32(a) may be used in the second display mode.

In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat a series of operations. Specifically, in the situation in which the rotation display of the base symbol images G6 to G8 is not performed, as shown in FIG. The loop display character G4 is displayed such that the motion is performed and the stopped motion is repeated (the display content is also referred to as a stopped display). The stopped motion may be, for example, a motion in which the loop display character G4 is moving up and down with the arms folded. On the other hand, in the situation where the rotation display is performed on any of the base symbol images G6 to G8, as shown in FIG. The loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform the moving motion over the same time and repeat the moving motion (the display content is also referred to as a moving display). The moving motion may be, for example, a motion in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction.

In the loop display effect, the loop display background G5 does not cause scrolling of the background, as shown in FIG. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the background continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing a moving motion, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the loop display character G4 is displayed as if it is moving in a predetermined direction. Accordingly, the loop display background G5 is displayed as if the background image is scrolling in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. In this case, the loop display background G5 is displayed such that a series of background images scrolls over the background movement unit period, and the series of background images is repeatedly scrolled every time the background movement unit period elapses. Is displayed.

The flow of the loop display effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33(a) shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 33(b) shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the moving action is performed, and FIG. 33(c). Shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the stopped motion is being performed, and FIG. 33(d) shows the flow of scroll display of the loop display background G5.

At the timing of t1, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 33(a), so that the variable display of the symbols G1 to G3 is started. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c), the loop display character G4 starts the moving motion from the state in which the stopped motion is being performed, and As shown in 33(d), scroll display is also started on the loop display background G5.

After that, the moving operation is repeated in the loop display character G4 and the scroll display of a series of background images is repeated in the loop display background G5 until the timing t6 when the current game time ends. Specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one movement operation during the movement unit period Tc1 at each of the timing t1 to the timing t2, the timing t2 to the timing t3, and the timing t3 to the timing t4. Is done. In this case, the next execution of the moving operation starts at the timing of t2 when one execution of the moving operation ends, and the next execution of the moving operation starts at t3 when one execution of the moving operation ends. One execution time is started, and at the timing of t4 when one execution time of the moving operation ends, the next execution time of the moving operation is started. In addition, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the moving action is the same, and the loop display character G4 at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the moving action. The display modes of G4 are the same.

For the loop display background G5, a series of scroll display of background images is performed once in the background movement unit period Tc2 from the timing t1 to the timing t5. In this case, the next one execution of the scroll display is started at the timing of t5 when the one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images ends. The display mode of the loop display background G5 at the start timing of each execution time of the scroll display is the same, and the loop display background at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the scroll display. The display modes of G5 are the same.

In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution time of the moving motion in the loop display character G4 and one execution time of the scroll display of the series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started at the same time, the end timing of each execution time is It will be different. In addition, the number of times one execution of the moving operation is performed in one game time and the number of times one execution of scroll display of a series of background images is performed in one game time may be different.

After that, at the timing of t6, the game display end timing comes as shown in FIG. 33(a), so that the loop display character G4 is moving as shown in FIG. 33(b) and FIG. 33(c). The state in which the operation is performed is switched to the state in which the operation is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 33D, the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed from the state in which a series of background images are scroll-displayed. It is switched to the open state. In this case, although the timing of t6 is a timing in the middle of one execution of the moving motion in the loop display character G4, the moving motion is ended at the timing in the middle thereof and the stopped motion is started. Further, the timing of t6 is a timing in the middle of one execution in the scroll display of the series of background images on the loop display background G5, and the stop display of the loop display background G5 is performed at the timing of t6. Be started.

The stopped motion is started in the loop display character G4 at the timing of t6, and the stopped motion is repeated in the loop display character G4 until the timing of t10 which is the timing when the next game time is started. Specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one non-stop operation in the non-stop unit period Tc3 at each of the timing t6 to the timing t7, the timing t7 to the timing t8, and the timing t8 to the timing t9. Is done. In this case, the next execution time of the stopping operation starts at the timing of t7 when one execution time of the stopping operation ends, and the next execution time of the stopping operation starts at t8 when one execution time of the stopping operation ends. One execution time is started, and at the timing of t9 at which one execution operation of the stopped operation ends, the next execution time of the stopped operation is started. Further, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the stopped motion is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the stopped motion. The display modes of G4 are the same. The staying unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, when compared in the same execution period, the number of executions of the stopped operation is one more than the number of executions of the moving operation.

After that, at the timing of t10, the game time is newly started as shown in FIG. In this case, the timing of the time t10 is a timing in the middle of one execution of the stopping motion of the loop displaying character G4 as shown in FIG. 33C, but the loop displaying character G4 performs the stopping motion. The moving operation is started from the state in the middle of moving. Then, the loop display character G4 repeatedly executes the moving motion as in the case of the timing of t1 to the timing of t6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed with the contents of the background image at the time when the previous game time is finished at the timing of t6, and the stopped display state. Is continued until the timing of t10. Therefore, at the timing of t10 when a new game time is started, scroll display of a series of background images is restarted from the stopped display state. That is, the scroll display of the series of background images is temporarily stopped from the timing of t6 to the timing of t10, and the scroll display of the series of background images is performed in the state of continuing the flow until the timing of t6 at the timing of t10. It will be restarted.

When the scroll display effect is executed as described above, both the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and the loop display character G4 and the loop are displayed during the game times. Although a series of display for a predetermined period is repeated on both of the display backgrounds G5, while the loop display character G4 repeats the stopped motion in a situation where the game time is not executed, the loop display background is displayed. In G5, the scroll display of a series of background images is stopped and displayed. In this case, if the tables for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are set as the same table, a non-game time table is prepared and the non-game time is set. It is necessary to prepare several tables corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed on the loop display background G5, or to fix the timings that are stopped and displayed on the loop display background G5. If an attempt is made to prepare a number of tables during non-game times corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, the number of the tables will increase and the memory capacity of the memory module 74 will be compressed, and the loop If an attempt is made to fix the timing of stop display in the display background G5, the display mode of the loop display background G5 during the non-game play will be uniform regardless of the timing at which the game play ends.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a table for display control of the loop display character G4 and a table for display control of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared. Hereinafter, the content of the data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the loop display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 34A, the memory module 74 stores in advance a loop display image data group 121 as data for performing a loop display effect. In the image data group 121 for loop display, the image data for displaying the base symbol images G6 to G8, the image data for displaying the symbols G1 to G3 in the base symbol images G6 to G8, and the loop display character G4. The image data for displaying and the image data for displaying the loop display background G5 are included. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes a plurality of types of image data used when performing the stopped motion and a plurality of types of images used when performing the moving motion. Data and are included. There are also a plurality of types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5.

In addition to the image data group 121 for loop display, the memory module 74 stores in advance a character retention table 122, a character movement table 123, and a background table 124. The character detention table 122 is a table referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the detained operation. The character moving table 123 is a table referred to for causing the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the moving motion. The background table 124 is a table that is referred to in order to scroll a series of background images in a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing a moving action.

FIG. 35(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character stopping table 122, FIG. 35(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character moving table 123, and FIG. 35(c) is for background. It is an explanatory view for explaining table 124. As shown in FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c), pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in each of the tables 122 to 124, and corresponding to each pointer information. Information of task contents is set. The task content information includes information for identifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame, and the position of the image data set as the display target (that is, the frame buffer). Parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the writing target frame areas 82a and 82b in 82) and scale information indicating the size of image data set as a display target is set.

In detail about each table, in the character retention table 122, pointer information (“0” to “99”) for the number of frames corresponding to the stationary unit period Tc3 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the image data of the loop display character G4 for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing of the stopped motion in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When the drawing timing of the image for one frame comes, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target for the pointer information that was the reference target at the previous drawing timing, and the loop is performed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, the stopped motion is performed in the loop display character G4. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character retention table 122 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 performs the stopped motion, the pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer of the character retention table 122. It returns to the pointer information of. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the stopped motion by using the character holding table 122 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution time of the stopped motion is set.

In the character moving table 123, pointer information (“0” to “199”) for the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the image data of the loop display character G4 for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing of the moving motion in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When the drawing timing of the image for one frame comes, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target for the pointer information that was the reference target at the previous drawing timing, and the loop is performed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, the moving motion is performed in the loop display character G4. When the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character moving table 123 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 performs the moving motion, the pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer of the character moving table 123. It returns to the pointer information of. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly execute the moving motion by using the character moving table 123 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution time of the moving motion is set.

In the background table 124, pointer information (“0” to “599”) for the number of frames corresponding to the background movement unit period Tc2 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the type of the image data of the loop display background G5 for displaying the scroll display background G5 at one timing in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. And parameter information to be applied to the image data is set. When the drawing timing of the image for one frame comes, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target for the pointer information that was the reference target at the previous drawing timing, and the loop is performed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By executing the display control of the display background G5, a series of background images are scroll-displayed on the loop display background G5. In addition, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the background table 124 is completed during the period in which the scroll display is performed on the loop display background G5, the pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer of the background table 124. We will return to information. Thereby, it becomes possible to repeatedly execute the scroll display by using the background table 124 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution of the scroll display is set.

In the configuration in which the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately provided, the operation of the stopped motion of the loop display character G4 is suppressed. In order to synchronize the start and the stop of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, the start of the moving operation of the loop display character G4 and the start of the scroll display of the loop display background G5 are synchronized with each other in FIG. ), the work RAM 73 is provided with an interlocking flag 125. The state in which the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1" corresponds to the situation in which the moving motion is performed in the loop display character G4, and in the situation in which the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1". Scroll display of the loop display background G5 is performed. On the other hand, the state in which the interlocking flag is "0" corresponds to the situation in which the stopped motion is performed in the loop display character G4, and the loop display is performed in the situation in which the interlocking flag 125 is "0". The scroll display of the background G5 is stopped.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, so that the game time ends. When the timing comes, the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed by stopping the updating of the pointer information of the background table 124, while the pointer information of the character retention table 122 is updated and the loop display character G4. It is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the stoppage display by performing the display control of. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing of ending the game time. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-gaming times corresponding to arbitrary timings, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is suppressed, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of.

There are four or more types of timings at which the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game times end.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop display effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the character loop executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the character loop is executed by the calculation process for effect of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

When it is specified that it is the start timing of the game time based on the currently read execution target table (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. Yes (step S1102). Thereafter, "1" is set to the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1103), and the pointer information of the reference target in the character moving table 123 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character moving table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character moving table 123. Grasp.

When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the game time based on the currently read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character retention table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. (Step S1106). Then, the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1107), and the pointer information of the reference target in the character retention table 122 is cleared to "0" (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character retention table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. Further, in step S1113, the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character retention table 122. To do.

If this time is neither the start timing nor the end timing of the game time (step S1101 and step S1105: NO), the pointer information is updated for the table to be used among the character movement table 123 and the character retention table 122 ( Step S1109). Specifically, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. When the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the table to be used (step S1110: YES), “0” is cleared to return the pointer information to the initial value (step S1110: YES). S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used is set as the image data to be used this time. To figure out. In step S1113, the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time is used by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used. Derive and figure out.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the background loop executed by the display CPU 72. The background loop calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S703 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

When "1" is set to the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1201: YES), the pointer information to be referenced in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. When the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), "0" is cleared to restore the pointer information to the initial value (step S1204). After that, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Further, the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1206). ..

When "1" is not set in the interlocking flag (step S1201: NO), the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is set this time. The image data of the loop display background G5 similar to the previous time is grasped as the image data of this time's use target by grasping as the image data of the use target of (step S1207). Further, by grasping the parameter information set in the area for storing the parameter information applied to the image data in the work RAM 73 as it is as the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time, the same as the previous time. The parameter information of the loop display background G5 is grasped as the parameter information to be used this time (step S1208).

When the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop are executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes steps S1112 and S1205 or The image data recognized in step S1207 is set as the drawing target. Also, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, so that the game time ends. When the timing comes, the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed by stopping the updating of the pointer information of the background table 124, while the pointer information of the character retention table 122 is updated and the loop display character G4. It is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the stoppage display by performing the display control of. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing of ending the game time. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-gaming times corresponding to arbitrary timings, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is suppressed, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of.

Dedicated pointer information is set in the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G4, and dedicated pointer information is set in the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5. By doing so, it is possible to continue updating the pointer information of the other one or hold the other pointer information to the predetermined information while not using one of the tables 122, 123, and 124. Become.

As a table for performing display control of the loop display character G4, a character retention table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a stop display, and a character retention table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a moving display. The character moving table 123 is provided separately. As a result, when changing the variable display mode of the loop display character G4, it is only necessary to switch the tables 122 and 123 to be used, and it is possible to suitably switch these variable display modes. Further, it is possible to set an arbitrary timing as the switching timing while suppressing the number of tables.

While the character retention table 122 is repeatedly looped and used, the loop display character G4 is caused to repeat the stationary display, and the character movement table 123 is repeatedly looped and used to move to the loop display character G4. Repeat the display. As a result, the data capacity of these tables 122 and 123 can be suppressed.

By repeatedly using the background table 124 in a loop, scroll display of the loop display background G5 is repeated. In this case, the number of image update timings required for the loop display background G5 to make one round and the number of image update timings required for the moving display of the loop display character G4 to make one round are different. In this configuration, a character moving table 123 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform the moving display and a background table 124 for causing the loop display background G5 to perform the scroll display are individually provided. As a result, it is possible to set only the information corresponding to one round in each of the tables 123 and 124, and there is no need to set useless information that exceeds one round.

When the character movement table 123 is used to start the moving display in the loop display character G4, the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1", so that the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is used. Scroll display is started, and when the moving display of the loop display character G4 is ended, the interlocking flag 125 is cleared to “0”, and thus the scroll display of the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is performed. Is ended. As a result, in the execution target table for controlling the overall flow of the loop display effect, only the information about the start timing and the end timing of the moving display for the loop display character G4 needs to be set. It is not necessary to set the information about the start timing and the end timing of the scroll display for the background G5. Therefore, it is possible to interlock the movements of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 while suppressing the amount of data preset in the data table.

<Another form related to loop display production>
When the loop display character G4 is performing a stationary operation, the relative position of the building image with respect to the loop display character G4 in the loop display background G5 is not changed, but the degree of light hitting the building image and the sky view The display mode such as the hue of the image, the presence/absence of the cloud image in the sky, and the display position may be changed. In this case, the display mode of the loop display background G5 is changed even in the situation where the scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, so the display control of the loop display background G5 in the situation is performed. It is preferable that a separate table is provided.

The scroll display of the loop display background G5 may be continued regardless of whether the moving display is being performed on the loop display character G4. Even in this case, by making the tables for the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 different, it is possible to prepare a table corresponding to the movement of each individual image G4, G5 for one round. Therefore, there is no need to set useless information that exceeds one round. This is the same even when the loop display character G4 continues the moving display and the loop display background G5 continues the scroll display.

The type of the loop display background G5 may be changed while the loop display character G4 continues to display while moving. Even with this configuration, by separately providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5, the loop can be switched when switching the loop display background G5. It is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the display background G5, and the table for controlling the loop display character G4 can be used as it is.

-The interlocking flag 125 is not provided, and in the execution target table for controlling the entire loop display effect, together with the information on the switching timing between the stationary display and the moving display in the loop display character G4, The configuration may be such that the information about the start timing and the stop timing of the scroll display on the loop display background G5 is set.

<Structure for performing group display production>
Next, a configuration for performing a group display effect will be described.

38(a) and 38(b) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the group display effect. The group display effect is an effect in which a large number of group display characters G11 are displayed as a group moving in the group display direction. The group display character G11 is displayed so that the player recognizes that a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both legs is represented. Further, the respective group display characters G11 are displayed so that the player recognizes that they are the same or similar characters, although the motion contents such as limbs are different. Then, the group display characters G11 are displayed so as to cross the symbol display device 41 as one group in one direction over the group display period (for example, 3 seconds). Comparing the case of FIG. 38(a) with the case of FIG. 38(b), the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. 38(a) is entirely left in FIG. 38(b). It is misaligned. In addition, each group display character G11 is displayed in a shape in which the player recognizes that the group display character G11 is moving in the direction of movement as a group.

The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be the vertical direction. Some of the group display characters G11 are directed from the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 toward the center. The remaining group display character G11 may be displayed so as to move toward the center from the end opposite to the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41.

The moving image data 131 for group display is used as image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect. The moving image data is image data which has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with one frame of still image data as a reference and which has been encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in the moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data is one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I picture data is data that can be used to create still image data for one frame by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data preceding by one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. .. When decoding B picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames after decoding. This is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

In the compressed data in the moving image data 131 for group display, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the m-th frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame,..., The n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

By performing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display, still image data (hereinafter, also referred to as decoded image data) for a plurality of update timings is created from the moving image data 131 for group display. The Rukoto. In this case, the group display moving image data 131 has a cycle in which the decoded image data can be used longer than the image update cycle in the symbol display device 41 in relation to the compression rate of the image data.

The relationship between the image update period and the period in which still image data can be used will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 40(a1) shows the update timing of the image in the symbol display device 41, FIG. 40(a2) shows the usable timing of the image data previously stored in the memory module 74 as still image data, and FIG. ) Indicates the usable timing of the decoded image data by the moving image data 131 for group display.

The image update period Td1 in the symbol display device 41 is 20 msec as already described, and as shown in FIG. 40(a1), timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5. , T6 timing and t7 timing, the image on the symbol display device 41 is updated. Further, since the image data prestored in the memory module 74 as the still image data can be used as it is, as shown in FIG. 40(a2), at each timing of timing t1 to timing t7. It can be used.

On the other hand, the usable period Td2 of the decoded image data by the moving image data 131 for group display is twice the image update period Td1 in the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 40(a3). Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, and the timing of t7, new decoded image data is generated at the timing of t2, the timing of t4, and the timing of t6. Cannot be used.

In this case, at each of the timing t2, the timing t4, and the timing t6, the same decoded image data as the decoded image data used at the timing t1, the timing t3, and the timing t5, which are the immediately preceding timings, is used. It is also possible to use. However, if the same decoded image data is simply used, there is a risk of image rattling, and smooth moving image display cannot be performed. On the other hand, at two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data is used, the drawing ranges in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in the same decoded image data are made different, It reduces the rattling of the image.

40(b) and 40(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which the drawing ranges in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the same decoded image data 132 are made different.

When drawing data is created in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the VDP 76, the data is written in all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800×600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, the decoded image data 132 obtained by performing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display is larger than the number of dots of the frame regions 82a and 82b in the size of the initial magnification after the decoding process. It is the number of pixels. The range in which the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification can be drawn is larger than the frame regions 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. As a result, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11 at the update timing of two consecutive times, the pattern display device 41 can be changed. The group display character G11 can be displayed as a whole.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the drawable range by the decoded image data 132 is the direction in the frame regions 82a and 82b. Although the width is set to be wider than that of the frame display characters G11 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, the direction different from the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group has the same dimension or a shorter dimension in the frame areas 82a and 82b. It may have a certain configuration.

At the front update timing of the two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display character G11 moves as a group in the decoded image data 132 as shown in FIG. The drawing range in the frame regions 82a and 82b is set to be closer to the front end, that is, the left end in the direction. On the other hand, at the update timing on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 40(c), in the decoded image data 132, the group display character G11 is brought close to the end on the original side in the direction of movement, that is, the end on the right side. Thus, the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set. That is, at the update timing on the rear side with respect to the update timing on the front side, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 in the frame regions 82a and 82b is on the opposite side to the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group. Moving. As a result, the group display character G11 displayed at the predetermined position at the front side update timing is displayed at the position moved to the left of the predetermined position at the rear side update timing. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the group display character G11 moves in a group as a group between the two updated timings. Such a display can be performed. In the decoded image data 132, a range outside the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is excluded from the drawing target.

Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is predetermined. It is the amount of movement. On the other hand, with respect to the group display character G11 at the rear side update timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the front side update timing in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next use timing is also the predetermined movement amount. It is the same.

That is, the first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are the two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Between the movement amount of the group display character G11, the update timing of the rear side displayed by using the first decoded image data 132, and the update timing of the front side displayed by using the second decoded image data 132 in between. The movement amount of the group display character G11 is set to be the same as the predetermined movement amount. More specifically, in both cases of using the first decoded image data 132 and the cases of using the second decoded image data 132, when comparing at the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 to be displayed, From the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front side update timing when using the first decoded image data 132, to the predetermined group display character at the front side update timing when using the second decoded image data 132 The amount of movement to the display position of G11 is from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the update timing on the front side when the first decoded image data 132 is used, and when the first decoded image data 132 is used. It is twice the amount of movement to the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the side update timing. Further, at least the group display character G11 is moved as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the drawable range by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification so that such a movement amount can be set. The dimension in the direction (specifically, the dimension in the lateral direction) is set to be larger than the dimension in the drawing direction of the frame regions 82a and 82b by at least the predetermined movement amount. With such a configuration, the movement amount of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing can be made constant, and the group display character G11 can be smoothly moved. Becomes

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for group display effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for group display effect is executed by the calculation processing for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the group display effect should be executed.

When it is time to execute the decoding process on the group display moving image data 131 (step S1301: YES), the address of the group display moving image data 131 in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302), and the group is moved. The address of the work RAM 73 for expanding the display moving image data 131 as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and further the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1304). Further, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether to use the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing at one update timing, and the value of the same use flag is "0". In some cases, it is specified to use the new decoded image data 132, and in the case where the value of the same use flag is "1", it is specified to use the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing. ..

When the processes of steps S1302 to S1305 are executed, the information of the address of the moving image data 131 for group display is set in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). At the same time, the information of the address of the expansion destination of the moving image data 131 for group display is set, and further the decode designation information is set. When the drawing list is received, the moving picture decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Specifically, the address of the moving image data 131 for group display is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), and the moving image data for group display is acquired from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area in which 131 is expanded as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1402). Then, the moving image data 131 for group display is read from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the moving image data 131 for group display is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S1402 (step S1403).

Returning to the description of the calculation process for group display effect (FIG. 41 ), if the negative determination is made in step S1301 or the process of step S1305 is executed, is the value of the same use flag in the work RAM 73 “0”? It is determined whether or not (step S1306). When the value of the same use flag is “0” (step S1306: YES), this means that it is the update timing for using the new decoded image data 132 this time. In this case, first, the address of the work RAM 73 in which the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the use order of this time is expanded among the decoded plurality of decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1307).

After that, the “A, A” coordinates are grasped as the coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining at which position the center pixel in the image data to be used is to be arranged with respect to the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. Then, in the case of the “A, B” coordinates, the set position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b becomes the position shown in FIG. The drawing range of is set. The value of A and the value of B are the same regardless of the type of decoded image data 132. Then, after updating and grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1309), "1" is set to the same use flag of the work RAM 73 (step S1310). As a result, at the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as the current update timing is used.

When the same use flag is set to "1" (step S1306: NO), this means that the update timing is the same as the previous update timing and the same decoded image data 132 is used. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 where the same decoded image data 132 as the previous time is expanded is grasped (step S1311).

Then, "A-1, B" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1312). When the coordinates are “A-1, B”, the set position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b is the position shown in FIG. The drawing range of is set. Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1314). As a result, the new decoded image data 132 will be used at the next update timing.

When the processes of steps S1307 to S1310 or steps S1311 to S1314 are executed, the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). The address information of the work RAM 73 in which is stored is set, and the parameter information including the coordinate information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 is set. When the drawing list is received, the VDP 76 executes the group display setting process as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S804 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the setting process for group display.

In the group display setting process, first, the information on the address where the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list (step S1501). Further, while the coordinate information applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is grasped from the drawing list (step S1502), other parameter information applied to the decoded image data 132 is grasped from the drawing list (step S1503). ).

By performing the setting process for group display as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S805), the current decoding is performed with the parameters applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. The image data 132 is drawn. In this case, if the coordinate information is "A, B", the range shown in FIG. 40(b) is drawn, and if the coordinate information is "A-1, B", the range shown in FIG. 40(c) is drawn. It Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data, whereby the group display effect is executed.

As described above, even if the period in which the decoded image data 132 of the moving image data 131 for group display can be used is twice the image update period in the symbol display device 41, the same decoded image data 132 is obtained. In two consecutive update timings in which the same is used, the same decoded image data 132 has different drawing ranges in the frame areas 82a and 82b. This makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of rattling of the image.

At two consecutive update timings when the same decoded image data 132 is used, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the front update timing and the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the rear update timing are equal to each other. Parts are duplicated. As a result, it is possible to cause a slight image change between two consecutive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132.

In two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display image at the rear update timing is different from the group display image at the rear update timing in each group display character G11. The drawing range is changed in the same decoded image data 132 in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b so that the position is shifted to the front side in the moving direction. As a result, even with the configuration in which the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to give continuity to the movement of the group display character G11.

The direction in which at least the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the drawable range by the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification is set to be wider than the direction in the frame regions 82a and 82b. ing. As a result, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11 at the update timing of two consecutive times, the pattern display device 41 can be changed. The group display character G11 can be displayed as a whole.

The first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are between two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Group display between the movement amount of the group display character G11, the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132, and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132. The movement amount of the user character G11 is set to be the same. As a result, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing can be made constant, and the group display character G11 can be moved smoothly.

An image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which a large number of group display characters G11 move in the same direction. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings.

<Another form related to group display production>
A dimension in a specific direction (specifically, a dimension in the horizontal direction) in which at least the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the drawable range by the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification. The decoded image data 132 after decoding is expanded from the size of the initial magnification, without being limited to the configuration in which the size in the drawing direction of the frame regions 82a and 82b is set to be larger by at least the predetermined amount of movement. Thus, at least the dimension in the specific direction may be set to be larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b by at least the predetermined movement amount. In this case, although it is necessary to perform size enlargement processing on the decoded image data 132, the display position of the group display character G11 is moved by a predetermined distance between two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132. It is possible to change the amount.

The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the vertical dimension in the drawable range of the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification or the decoded image data 132 after the enlargement processing from the size of the initial magnification is at least the vertical dimension in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b. Needs to be set larger by at least the predetermined movement amount.

The group display character G11 is not limited to humans, and may be other animals such as cats, fish, and dogs, or may be a figure that is a figure other than animals.

A plurality of the same group display characters G11 have the same configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing ranges in the frame areas 82a and 82b are made different at each of the update timings. It may be applied to an image other than the image that moves in the entire direction. For example, the above configuration may be applied when a moving image display is performed in which a large single image that exceeds the size of the liquid crystal display unit 41a of the symbol display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

Decoding obtained by decoding the moving image data 131 with a configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing ranges in the frame regions 82a and 82b are made different at each of the update timings. It may be applied to image data other than the image data 132. For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

<Structure for performing effective period display performance>
Next, a configuration for performing the effective period display effect will be described.

43(a) and 43(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the effective period display effect. The effective period display effect is an operation-corresponding effect that changes effect contents depending on whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated during the effective period in which the operation of the effect operation device 48 is enabled. When performed, it is an effect of displaying the effective period on the symbol display device 41.

In the effective period display effect, an operation promotion image G21 for making it possible for the player to recognize that the operation device 48 for effect should be operated on the symbol display device 41 is displayed, and the operation device 48 for effect is also displayed. An effective period image G22 is displayed for allowing the player to recognize the remaining period during which the operation is effective. As the operation promotion image G21, specifically, an image representing the effect operation device 48 is displayed, and an image that allows the effect operation device 48 to be recognized as being operated is displayed. Specific display contents are arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the device 48 should be operated.

A frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed as the valid period image G22. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the effective period image G22, and is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame shape. The strip image G24 is displayed so as to extend rightward from the left end of the frame portion in the frame portion by the frame image G23 as a base end, and the effective period display effect is started as shown in FIG. 43(a). In this case, the frame image G23 is displayed so as to fill the entire inside of the frame portion, and as the remaining valid period decreases, the tip position, which is the rightmost position, is displayed as shown in FIG. 43(b). The area is gradually moved toward the left end and is displayed such that the area filled in the frame by the frame image G23 is narrowed. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the tip position of the belt image G24, and is displayed so as to move in accordance with the tip position when the tip position of the belt image G24 gradually moves to the left end. Further, the blinking image G25 is displayed as if it were blinking entirely.

Here, in the case of the configuration in which the blinking image G25 is displayed in a blinking manner while moving in accordance with the movement of the belt image G24, data for controlling the movement of the belt image G24 and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 are controlled. If one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed, the other is also changed. Will end up. A case where the event occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 44(a) shows how the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44(b) shows how the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 changes.

When the effective period display effect is started, the movement display of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 44(a), and blinking as shown in FIG. 44(b). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t5, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed.

Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed which is faster than the first speed, as shown in FIG. The speed is changed by referring to data in a predetermined order among reference data set in time series in the data for controlling the display of the movement of the band image G24 to perform display control, and then in a specific order. Is performed by shortening the time required to perform display control with reference to. Specifically, when the pointer information set in serial numbers and the task content information that corresponds to the pointer information in a one-to-one correspondence are set as data for display control, a predetermined value is set. Information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information in the specific order, which is the order after the predetermined order, after the display control of the band image G24 is performed by referring to the information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information in the order. By changing the number of occurrences of the image update timing that occurs until the display control of the band image G24 is performed, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed. In this case, if the data for display control of the band image G24 and the data for display control of the blinking image G25 are set together in the display control data, the leading end of the band image G24 moves. In order to change the speed, the display control is performed by referring to the information of the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information in the predetermined order, and then the task corresponding to the pointer information in the specific order, which is the order after the predetermined order, is performed. If the number of times the image update timing occurs until display control is performed with reference to the content information, the blinking period of the blinking image G25 will be changed accordingly.

That is, when the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at the timing of t5 in FIG. 44(a), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 as shown in FIG. 44(b). Also changes from the first blinking cycle Te1 to the second blinking cycle Te2. This is also the case when the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, and when the data for display control is collectively set, if the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed. The movement speed is also changed.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the data for controlling the display content of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display content of the blinking image G25 collectively. It is provided separately. Hereinafter, the content of the data stored in advance in the memory module 74 to execute the effective period display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 45.

As shown in FIG. 45, the frame display image data 141 for displaying the frame image G23 and the band display image for displaying the band image G24 are displayed in the memory module 74 as data for performing the effective period display effect. The image data 142, the lighting image data 143 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lit state, and the extinguishing image data 144 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the unlit state are stored in advance. By drawing the frame display image data 141 in the VDP 76 in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b, the frame image G23 can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

The band display image data 142 is set to a size capable of filling the entire frame portion of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, and the left end portion of the belt image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification, the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23. Then, while gradually reducing the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 from the initial magnification, the band display image of the size is adjusted so that the left end portion of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the data 142, an image in which the leading end of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end is displayed.

The lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 are both image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 have the same initial magnification. Size and shape. However, the lighting image data 143 displays the blinking image G25 of a relatively bright color, and the image data 144 for turning off displays the blinking image G25 of a relatively dark color. Only one of the turning-on image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 is used at each image update timing, and the image data 143, 144 targeted for use has a blinking image G25 at the tip of the band image G24. The coordinate information for the frame regions 82a and 82b is set so that the frame regions 82a and 82b are displayed in an overlapping manner from the front side. Then, by alternately repeating the period in which the lighting image data 143 is used and the period in which the turning-off image data 144 is used, the blinking image G25 in the lighting state and the blinking image G25 in the turning-off state are displayed. The display will be alternately repeated. This makes it possible to display the blinking image G25 as if the light was blinking.

In addition to the various image data 141 to 144, the memory module 74 stores in advance a band display table 145 and a blinking display table 146. The band display table 145 is data for executing the display control of the band image G24, and specifically, the lateral size information of the band display image data 142 and the position information of the leading end portion of the band image G24 are determined. It is the collected data. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25, and specifically, the image data to be used for the blinking image G25 is determined from among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144. It is the collected data. The band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described in detail.

FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the band display table 145. As shown in FIG. 46A, in the band display table 145, pointer information is set so as to be serial numbers, and the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 is associated with each pointer information. A combination of the information and the position information of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set. By reducing the size of the band display image data 142 by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target, the horizontal display range of the band image G24 is narrowed. Then, the band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b such that the left end portion of the band image G24 overlaps the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23, so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 gradually becomes the left end. The image moving toward is displayed. Further, the leading edge position information corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target is the leading edge portion of the belt image G24 when the belt display image data 142 is drawn in a reduced size at the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. It corresponds to the position of. Then, the target image data of the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 is drawn so as to be at the position corresponding to the leading end position information, so that the leading end portion of the belt image G24 overlaps from the front side. In this way, the blinking image G25 is displayed.

When the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the front end portion of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, the band image G24 is updated a plurality of times (for example, five times) over a certain number of times of image updating on the band side. The same size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the band side specified number of times, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are specified to the band side. Reference is made over the number of times the image is updated. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the belt-side specific number of image update timings elapses, so that the belt image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at the first speed, and the tip portion of the belt image G24 is displayed. A blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

On the other hand, when the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the tip portion of the band image G24 moves at the second speed that is faster than the first speed, the band side predetermined number of times (the number of times that is less than the band side specific number of times ( The same size information and tip position information corresponding to one piece of pointer information are referenced over the image update timings of, for example, twice. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the predetermined number of times on the belt side, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are determined by the predetermined information on the belt side. Reference is made over the number of times the image is updated. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the belt-side predetermined number of image update timings elapse, whereby the belt image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at the second speed that is faster than the first speed. At the same time, a blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the front end portion from the front side.

FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. 46(b), pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to be a serial number, and the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 are associated with each pointer information. Of these, image data to be used is set. The image data 143, 144 set as the use target in the pointer information being the reference target is the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information being the reference target in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image. By being drawn at the position, the blinking image G25 in a state corresponding to the image data 143, 144 to be used is displayed in an overlapping manner from the front side on the tip portion of the band image G24.

In the blinking display table 146, the lighting image data 143 is set as the image data to be used for the pointer information of “0” to “9”, and the pointer information of “10” to “19” is set. In other words, the extinguishing image data 144 is set as the image data to be used. When the display control using the blinking display table 146 is performed, the pointer information to be referred to is incremented by 1 each time the pointer information is updated, and the value of the pointer information after the addition of 1 is the maximum value. When it exceeds 19", the value of the pointer information of the reference target is cleared to "0". That is, while the effective period display effect is being performed, if the pointer information that is the reference target of the blinking display table 146 starts from “0” and becomes “19” is one reference cycle, the reference cycle Will be repeated multiple times. As a result, the amount of data in the blinking display table 146 can be suppressed.

When the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed such that the blinking period of the blinking image G25 becomes the first blinking period Te1, the display timing of the image is updated a plurality of times (for example, twice) at a specific number of times of the blinking side. The same image data 143, 144 to be used corresponding to the pointer information of is referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information of the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the blinking side specific number of times, and the image data 143, 144 of the same use target corresponding to the pointer information. Is referred to over a specific number of times the image is updated on the blinking side. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the image update timing of the flashing side specific number of times elapses, so that the first part of the flashing image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the front end portion of the belt image G24 from the front side. The blinking display is performed at the blinking cycle Te1.

On the other hand, when the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking period of the blinking image G25 becomes the second blinking period Te2, the blinking side predetermined number (for example, one time), which is less than the blinking side specific number of times. The same image data 143, 144 to be used corresponding to one pointer information is referred to throughout the image update timing. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the blinking side predetermined number of times, and the image data 143, 144 of the same use target corresponding to the pointer information. Is referred to over a predetermined number of image update timings on the blinking side. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time a predetermined number of image update timings on the blinking side elapse, so that the second portion of the blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the belt image G24 from the front side. The blinking display is performed at the blinking cycle Te2.

The manner in which the effective period display effect is executed by using both the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47. 47(a1) and 47(a2) show the movement speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24, and FIGS. 47(b1) and 47(b2) show the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25.

First, with reference to FIGS. 47(a1) and 47(b1), a case will be described in which the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed under the condition that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is constant.

When the effective period display effect is started, movement display of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 47(a1), and blinking is performed as shown in FIG. 47(b1). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t15, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed.

After that, at the timing of t15, the number of times of image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is changed to a predetermined number of times on the belt side, which is less than the specified number of times on the belt side. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(a1), the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed which is faster than the first speed. On the other hand, the number of times of image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is maintained at the blinking side specific number until then, as shown in FIG. 47(b1). The blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47(a2) and 47(b2), a case will be described in which the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed under the condition that the movement speed of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 is constant.

When the effective period display effect is started, movement display of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 is started at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 47(a2), and blinking is made as shown in FIG. 47(b2). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from timing t21 to timing t25, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed.

After that, at the timing of t25, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to a predetermined number of blinking sides, which is less than the specific number of blinking sides. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(b2), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 shorter than the first blinking cycle Te1. On the other hand, the number of times of image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is maintained at the band side specific number up to that point, as shown in FIG. The moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the band image G24, and the blink display table 146 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the flashing image G25. By being provided, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 while keeping the other unchanged. As a result, the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 can be independently changed, and it is possible to suitably realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect. ..

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation that the operation-specific special effect is executed when the operation device 48 for operation is operated during the effective period. Has been. Specifically, the case where the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end is the first display content, When the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed in the middle and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end, the second display content and the belt image G24 When the moving speed of the tip portion is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 in the middle, the third display content is used. The above-mentioned degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display content, and the above-mentioned degree of expectation of the third display content is higher than that of the second display content. Accordingly, by confirming the display contents of the belt image G24 and the blinking image G25, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation that the operation-specific special effect is executed when the operation device 48 for operation is operated. The player's attention to the effective period display effect can be increased.

Moreover, when the operation device 48 for operation is operated, the special operation effect corresponding to it is performed, and when the operation device 48 for effect is operated, the operation special effect is not executed for it. The occurrence probability of the operation-specific special effect is set so that the degree of expectation of a jackpot result in the corresponding game time is higher than in the case. In this case, since the display contents of the belt image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the execution expectation of the operation-specific special effect as described above, the display contents of the belt image G24 and the blinking image G25 are also associated with the expectation of the jackpot result. It has been done. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the effective period display effect.

In addition, when the operation device for production 48 is operated in the effective period, one of a plurality of types of operation corresponding effects including the first operation corresponding effect and the second operation corresponding effect may be executed, and in this case. The display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 may be associated with the execution expectation degree of a predetermined operation corresponding effect.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the effective period display effect will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for displaying the effective period, which is executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation processing for displaying the effective period is executed by the calculation processing for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the effective display effect is to be executed.

When it is the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). Then, as processing for setting the moving speed of the band image G24, the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first speed (step S1603), and the flashing cycle of the flashing image G25 is set. As a process, the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first blinking cycle Te1 (step S1604).

Thereafter, of the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for extinguishing 144, the image data to be used which is set in the blinking display table 146 in correspondence with the first pointer information is used to display the blinking image G25 this time. The image data is grasped as the image data (step S1613), and the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614). After that, the size information set in association with the first pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and at the same time, the band display table 145. In step S1616, the tip position information set corresponding to the first pointer information is grasped as position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 (step S1616). Further, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the calculation processing for displaying the effective period is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605), the lighting image data 143 and the extinction image data 144 are included. Of these, the image data to be used, which is set in the blinking display table 146 in correspondence with the first pointer information, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. In addition, the parameter information acquired in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

When it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the belt image G24 side (step S1605). When the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, and the number of times the image update timing has occurred since the pointer information in the band display table 145 was updated last time is the band-side specific number. When it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the belt image G24 side and the moving speed of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 is set to the second speed, the pointer information in the belt display table 145 is updated last time. When the number of occurrences of the image update timing from (1) is a predetermined number of times on the belt side, it is determined to be the update timing of the pointer information on the belt image G24 side. If it is the update timing of the pointer information on the side of the band image G24 (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 is incremented by 1 (step S1606). ).

When it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607). When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the first blinking cycle Te1, when the number of times of image update timing since the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 was updated last time is the blinking side specific number. When it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set to the second blinking period Te2, the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 has been updated since the last update. When the number of times the image update timing is generated is the predetermined number on the blinking side, it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side. If it is the update timing of the pointer information on the side of the blinking image G25 (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the blinking display table 146 is incremented by 1 (step S1608). ).

If it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 (step S1609). Whether or not the moving speed is changed, and when changing the moving speed, the change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and whether the display CPU 72 is the timing determined at the start. To judge. Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image serving as the change timing at the start of the current effective period display effect is determined, and the determined number of update timings of the image is determined. In such a case, a method of identifying the above change timing can be considered. When it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), the updating period of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the second speed as the moving speed setting process of the band image G24. A corresponding update cycle is set (step S1610).

When it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). Whether or not the blinking cycle is changed and the timing of changing the blinking cycle are determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and whether the display CPU 72 is the timing determined at the start. To judge. Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image serving as the change timing at the start of the current effective period display effect is determined, and the determined number of update timings of the image is determined. In such a case, a method of identifying the above change timing can be considered. When it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), the updating cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 corresponds to the second blinking cycle Te2 as the setting processing of the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. It is set to the update cycle (step S1612).

After that, of the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for extinguishing 144, the image data of the use target set corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target in the blink display table 146 is displayed as the blink image G25 this time. It is grasped as the image data to be used (step S1613). In this case, when the processing of step S1608 is not executed in the current processing time, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target in the previous processing time is grasped, and the processing of step S1608 in the current processing time is performed. When the process is being executed, the image data corresponding to the pointer information which is newly updated and is the reference target this time is grasped. Further, the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614).

After that, the size information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target is grasped as size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display is performed. The tip position information set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the use table 145 is used as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the image data 143 for turning on and the image data 144 for turning off. To figure out. In this case, when the processing of step S1606 is not executed in the current processing time, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information which is the reference target in the previous processing time is grasped, and the current processing time is determined. When the process of step S1606 is executed in step S1, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that is newly updated and becomes the reference target this time is grasped. Also, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the calculation processing for displaying the valid period is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144. Of these, the use target image data set in the blinking display table 146 in association with the current pointer information of the reference target, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as the drawing targets. .. In addition, the parameter information acquired in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for controlling the display content of the band image G24, and the blink display table 146 is provided as data for controlling the display content of the flashing image G25. By doing so, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 while keeping the other unchanged. As a result, the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 can be independently changed, and it is possible to suitably realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect. ..

In particular, when changing the moving speed of the front end portion of the band image G24, only the updating cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is changed, and therefore, the same band displaying speed is used regardless of the moving speed. The table 145 is used. Similarly, when the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, only the updating cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is changed. Therefore, the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle. used. For example, in the configuration in which the data for controlling the display content of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display content of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in one table, the tip portion of the band image G24 is set. If one of the moving speed and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is to be changed without affecting the other, it is necessary to separately prepare a table corresponding to the table, and the table shows a combination of the moving speed and the blinking cycle. The number of types required. Then, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 required to store the table in advance increases. On the other hand, the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the movement speed, and the same blink display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle. It is possible to realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of 74.

In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to information on a position at which image data to be used is set among the image data 143 for turning on and the image data 144 for turning off is set. Thereby, the information for arranging the blinking image G25 at the position of the tip portion of the belt image G24 is set in association with the information that determines the display mode of the belt image G24. Therefore, in the configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are individually provided, the processing configuration for adjusting the relative position between the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 can be simplified. ..

<Another form related to effective period display performance>
The pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is only “0” and “1”, one of these “0” and “1” corresponds to the lighting image data 143, and the other is the turning-off image data. The configuration corresponding to 144 may be adopted. In this case, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to either the first blinking cycle Te1 or the second blinking cycle Te2 by adjusting the update cycle of the pointer information between “0” and “1”. It becomes possible. According to this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the data amount of the blinking display table 146.

When the moving speed of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 is the first speed, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the belt display table 145 at each update timing of the image, and the leading end portion of the belt image G24. When the moving speed of is the second speed, two or more values may be added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 at each image update timing. That is, the value added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 may be different for each update timing of the image at the first speed and the second speed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed while using the same band display table 145.

When the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 at each image update timing, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is In the case of the second blinking cycle Te2, two or more values may be added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 at each image update timing. In other words, the first blinking period Te1 and the second blinking period Te2 may be configured such that the value added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 is different for each update timing of the image. Even with the configuration, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 can be changed between the first blinking cycle Te1 and the second blinking cycle Te2 while using the same blinking display table 146.

The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types. The blinking period of the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types. It may be. Further, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types.

-Instead of the configuration in which the blinking display table 146 is used to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, the blinking image G25 is displayed without using the table by the processing in the program. The type of image data used to perform the above may be determined.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes with time, at least one of the shape and the color of the band image G24 may change with time. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the blinking image G25 with the passage of time. The configuration may be changed according to the above.

<Structure for performing number display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing the number display effect will be described.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the number display effect. The number display effect is an effect of displaying the number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as the acquired number) that the player has acquired from the start of the opening/closing execution mode in the opening/closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode on the symbol display device 41. .. The acquired number is the difference between the total number of game balls paid out to the player from the start of the opening/closing execution mode and the total number of game balls launched into the game area PA from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. That is. Also, the display of the acquired number by the number display effect is started when the opening period is started in the opening/closing execution mode, and when the opportunity for paying out the game ball to the player is generated in the opening/closing execution mode and when the game ball is shot. When is performed, the display content is changed accordingly. More specifically, with reference to FIG. 49, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the symbol display device 41 when the display effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being performed on the symbol display device 41. By checking the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired in the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing the number display effect.

To the MPU 52 of the main controller 50, prize detection sensors 151 to 154, a launch ball detection sensor 155, and a return ball detection sensor 156 are electrically connected. The prize detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of a prize that triggers the payout of game balls, and are provided in the general prize hole 31, the special electric prize device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. Plural types are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives detection signals from each of the plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151 to 154. When the MPU 52 receives a signal from one of the prize detection sensors 151 to 154 corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball in the corresponding ball input unit, the number of game balls corresponding to the prize is detected. The prize ball command for instructing the payout is transmitted to the payout control device 55.

The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which the MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a includes a ROM 159b that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 159a and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 159b. A RAM 159c, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. The payout device 56 is electrically connected to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55. When the MPU 159a receives a prize ball command from the main control device 50, it drives the payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56. The payout of gaming balls is started by starting the output of the signal. Then, in the case where the MPU 159a determines that the payout number of gaming balls measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56 corresponds to the information of the number set in the prize ball command. First, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 56a is stopped to stop the payout of the game balls. Further, the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, every time the payout detection sensor 56b detects one game ball, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 indicates that the payout completion signal indicating that one game ball has been paid out. To send.

The shooting ball detection sensor 155 is provided in the game ball shooting mechanism 161 for shooting a game ball toward the game area PA when the shooting operating device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the inner frame 13 showing an enlarged lower side region of the inner frame 13. The game ball launching mechanism 161 is provided below the game board 24 on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The game ball launching mechanism 161 is a launch rail 162 that extends toward a guide rail formed on the game board 24, and an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 46a onto the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail. A certain solenoid 163 and a holding member 164 for holding one gaming ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 162 at a position where the game ball B1 can be launched by the solenoid 163 are provided. When the firing operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 60 msec) is reached, and the game ball is launched by the solenoid 163.

In the game ball launching mechanism 161, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the position of the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162. That is, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect the game ball launched from the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail, and the game ball detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 is the launch rail. There is no backflow of 162.

The launch ball detection sensor 155 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a launch ball detection signal when the game ball B1 is present in the detection range. When B1 does not exist in the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as the launch ball non-detection signal. Therefore, it becomes possible to specify the number of game balls that have been shot toward the guide rail by passing through the position of the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 by the shot ball detection sensor 155. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the shot ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in the return ball collection unit 165 that collects the game balls that have been launched from the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail but have flowed back in the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. Has been. The return ball recovery unit 165 is formed in a region formed by laterally separating the guide rail and the firing rail 162 on the front surface of the inner frame 13, and exists between both rails. The return ball recovery unit 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth dimension, and the space is opened upward. The return ball recovery unit 165 is communicated with the lower plate 47a, and the game ball B1 recovered by the return ball recovery unit 165 is discharged to the lower plate 47a by its own weight.

The return ball detection sensor 156 in the return ball recovery unit 165 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the position of the most downstream portion of the return ball recovery unit 165. That is, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect the game ball flowing down from the most downstream portion of the return ball recovery unit 165 toward the lower plate 47a.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a return ball detection signal when the game ball is present in the detection range. When it does not exist in the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as the return sphere non-detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to specify the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection unit 165 by the return ball detection sensor 156. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. The return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives the payout completion signal from the MPU 159a of the payout controller 55, the result of receiving the launch ball detection signal from the launch ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball. A command corresponding to each reception result of the return ball detection signal from the detection sensor 156 is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62. For details about these commands, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 measures the number of times the payout completion signal is received, and when the receipt of the payout completion signal occurs 10 times, the payout of 10 game balls is completed. The award ball completion command in which the information indicating is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62. If the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 does not receive the next payout completion signal even after the reception standby period (for example, 2 sec) has elapsed since the last time the payout completion signal was received, the MPU 52 transmits the prize ball completion command last time. After that, even if the number of times the payout completion signal is received has not reached 10, the prize ball completion command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62. In this prize ball completion command, information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the prize ball completion command was transmitted last time is set. Further, when the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives the launch ball detection signal from the launch ball detection sensor 155, it sends a launch execution command indicating that one gaming ball has been launched to the sound-light side MPU 62. Then, when the return sphere detection signal is received from the return sphere detection sensor 156, a return sphere generation command indicating that one return sphere has been generated is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62.

When the sound/light side MPU 62 is in the open/close execution mode, it is possible to display the number of acquired balls each time it receives a prize ball completion command, a launch execution command, and a return ball generation command from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50. Perform measurement processing. Then, the measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement process is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 at the transmission timing of the measurement command. The display CPU 72 displays the number display image G31 on the symbol display device 41 while reflecting the content of the received measurement command.

Hereinafter, the content of processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 to perform the number display effect will be described. First, the contents of processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 62 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the sound-light side MPU 62. The counting process is executed by the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the prize ball completion command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (step S1701 and step S1702: YES), the measurement counter 166 provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to the prize ball completion command received this time. A value corresponding to the number of completed payouts of the existing game balls is added (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter used for counting the number of acquisitions generated from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the open/close execution mode. For example, when the prize ball completion command indicating that the payout of 10 game balls is completed is received, the value of “10” is added to the measurement counter 166, and the payout of 3 game balls is completed. When the prize ball completion command indicating is received, the value of “3” is added to the measurement counter 166.

When the firing execution command is received in the open/close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1704: YES), “1” is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both a positive value and a negative value. For example, when the value of the measurement counter 166 is “5”, a measurement execution command is received. The value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "4", and when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "0" and the firing execution command is received, the value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "-1". When the return ball generation command is received in the open/close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1706: YES), “1” is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a measurement command output setting process executed by the sound-light side MPU 62. The counting process is executed by the command selection process of step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the output setting process of the measurement command, it is first determined whether or not it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command occurs when the command output cycle elapses in the open/close execution mode. The command output cycle is set as a cycle longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31. More specifically, the command output cycle is longer than a cycle obtained by doubling the update cycle of the number display image G31. It is set as a cycle shorter than the tripled cycle. The update cycle of the number display image G31 is set as a cycle longer than 20 msec which is the update cycle of the image for one frame, and is set to 300 msec, for example. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 that occurs when the update cycle of the number display image G31 elapses corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

If it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter 166 is “0” or more, so that the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the acquired number. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). When the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the acquired number (step S1802: YES), the increase measurement command is read from the sound-light side ROM 63, and the measurement counter is added to the read increase measurement command. Information corresponding to the current value of 166 is set (step S1803). Then, the increase measurement command after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has increased, and also specifies the increased number.

When it is the output timing of the measurement command and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than “0” (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the decrease in the acquired number. It means doing. In this case, the reduction measurement command is read from the sound-light side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set in the read reduction measurement command (step S1805). Then, the reduction measurement command after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has decreased, and also specifies the decreased number.

When the process of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to “0” (step S1807). As a result, the information about the acquired number that is the setting target for the measurement command is erased from the measurement counter 166.

Next, the contents of processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the measurement command handling process executed by the display CPU 72. The measurement command handling process is executed by the command handling process of step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When the increase measurement command is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73 displays the increase in the acquired number set in the increase measurement command received this time. A value corresponding to the number is added (step S1902). The reflecting counter 167 is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of increments/decrements to be reflected in the future from the display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. When the reduction measurement command is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to the number of reductions of the acquired number set in the reduction measurement command received this time. The value is subtracted (step S1904).

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the calculation processing for measurement display executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the measurement display calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19).

If it is the update timing of the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the subtraction process of the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is performed. Execute (step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, as the value of the total counter 168 changes, the content of the number display image G31 also changes accordingly. In the subtraction processing of the total counter 168, the value of the decrease in the acquired number set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the current value of the total counter 168. That is, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number, all the values of the decreased acquisition number set in the reflection counter 167 are used for the total regardless of the value. It is reflected in the value of the counter 168. As a result, when a decrease in the acquired number occurs, all of the decreased amount will be collectively reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. After that, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" (step S2004).

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0” or more at the update timing of the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more. It is determined (step S2005). When the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0”. In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at the current update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the display content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2005: YES), it is determined whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is the first reference value or more (step S2006). Here, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to increase can be easily continued for a long time, and the acquired number increases in the open/close execution mode. It is easy to give the player the impression of being present.

A plurality of types of values to be added to the acquired number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. Specifically, the value to be added is “5” which is the first addition target value. , "3" which is the second addition target value smaller than the first addition target value and "1" which is the third addition target value smaller than the second addition target value are set. Then, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the value of “12” preset as the first reference value, “5” is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is changed. If it is larger than the value of “5” preset as the second reference value that is smaller than the first reference value, “3” is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is selected. When is less than or equal to the value of "5", "1" is selected as the value to be added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflecting counter 167 from being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 from becoming extremely large. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the manner of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

By the way, when the payout motor 56a operates at a normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out the game balls at a rate of one in 24 msec. Also, the firing cycle of the game ball is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output cycle of the measurement command by the sound-light side MPU 62 is about 720 msec. Then, since the value of the increase in the acquired number included in the measurement command for increase is set to "18" at the maximum, the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes larger than the first reference value. Can occur.

More specifically, in the calculation processing for measurement display, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2007). ), the first addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the first addition target value, and the value of the increased acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the first addition target value. Decrease.

When the value of the reflecting counter 167 is less than or equal to the first reference value and larger than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the sum counter 168 ( In step S2010), the second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the second addition target value, and the value of the increased acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the second addition target value. Decrease.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2012), and the reflection counter 167 determines the third addition target. The value is subtracted (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the third addition target value, and the value of the increased acquired number waiting in the reflecting counter 167 is increased by the third addition target value. Decrease.

When the process of step S2004 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S2005, the process of step S2008 is executed, the process of step S2011 is executed, or the process of step S2013 is executed, a total counter The image data corresponding to the value of 168 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, the parameter information applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). As a result, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 is drawn with image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current value of the total counter 168 as the number display image G31. It is set as a target. Further, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

Next, how the number display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 56(a) shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound-light side MPU 62, FIG. 56(b) shows how the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56(c) shows the number display image G31. Indicates the update timing.

At the timing of t1, the measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “17” is set as the increase in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to “17” as shown in FIG. 56(b). However, since the timing t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

After that, at the timing of t2, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is “17”, which is a value larger than the first reference value. Therefore, as shown in FIG. “5” that is Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the values so far.

Thereafter, at each of the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is smaller than or equal to the first reference value and larger than the second reference value, and therefore, as shown in FIG. "3", which is the value to be added by 2, is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the values so far.

Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is a reduction measurement command in which “3” is set as the reduction amount of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the value of the reflecting counter 167 is updated by subtracting "3" from "6" to "3" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at each of the timing of t6 and the timing of t7, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, and thus the third addition target value “1” is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. 56(b). Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the values so far.

Thereafter, at the timing of t8, the measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “5” is set as the increase in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the value of the reflection counter 167 is incremented by 5 from "1" and updated to "6" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the count display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is again larger than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is the second addition target value “3”. Is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the values so far.

Thereafter, at each of the timing t10, the timing t12, and the timing t13, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, and thus the third addition target value “1” is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. 56(b). Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the values so far. Although the measurement command is transmitted at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 56A, since “0” is set in the measurement command as information on the increase/decrease of the acquired number, the reflection counter The value of 167 has not changed.

Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c), but the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0” as shown in FIG. 56(b). The value of the reflecting counter 167 is maintained as it is, and the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is also maintained.

After that, at the timing of t15, the measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is a reduction measurement command in which “5” is set as the reduction amount of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the value of the reflection counter 167 is subtracted by 5 from "0" and updated to "-5" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at the timing of t16, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number. When the value of the reflecting counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease of the acquired number, it is reflected on the display of the acquired number at once regardless of the value. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0".

As described above, the number of game balls acquired after the opening/closing execution mode is started as the number display effect is displayed while being changed in accordance with the increase/decrease in the actual number of acquired balls, so that Also, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the number of game balls that have been acquired by that time. In this case, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to increase can be easily continued for a long time, and the acquired number increases in the open/close execution mode. It is easy to give the player the impression of being present.

Plural kinds of values to be added to the acquired number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. The larger the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31, and the smaller the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1, the number display image G31 becomes 1. At the update timing of one time, the value to be added to the acquired number becomes a small value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflecting counter 167 from being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 from becoming extremely large. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the manner of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes less than or equal to the first reference value and the second addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31, the value of the reflection counter 167 is not changed thereafter. When the value becomes larger than the first reference value, the situation returns to the situation where the first addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31. As a result, it is possible to update the display of the acquired number in an appropriate mode for the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

When the value of the reflecting counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number, the decreased value is acquired at once in the number display image G31 regardless of the value of the reflecting counter 167. It is reflected in the display of the number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period for updating the display of the acquired number from decreasing from being continued for a long time. Further, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, the value of the reflection counter 167 can be cleared to “0” at one update timing of the number display image G31, and then reflected. It becomes possible to make the value of the counter 167 for use become a positive value easily. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities for updating the display of the acquired number to increase.

<Further different form regarding number display production>
When the prize ball command is transmitted to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 instead of the configuration in which the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 transmits the prize ball completion command to the sound-light side MPU 62, the same prize ball command is transmitted as the sound light. It may be configured to transmit to the side MPU 62. In this case, the number of game balls to be paid out, which is not actually paid out, is added to the display of the acquired number.

-The number of game balls shot by the shot ball detection sensor 155 and the number of return balls of the game ball detected by the return ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the display of the acquired number. One or both of them may not be reflected in the display of the acquired number.

The number display effect is configured to be started when the opening period is started in the opening/closing execution mode, but instead, is started when the opening period is ended and the first round game time is started. It may be configured.

The number display effect is configured to end when the one-time open/close execution mode ends. However, when the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, the number display effect is performed in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode occurs multiple times without interposing the low frequency support mode, the number of game balls acquired after the first open/close execution mode is started is continuously displayed. May be In addition, when the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode after the end of the opening-and-closing execution mode, the number display effect is continued in the high-probability mode, and the opening-and-closing execution mode occurs a plurality of times without interposing the low-probability mode. In this case, the number of game balls acquired after the first opening/closing execution mode is started may be continuously displayed.

It is possible to identify whether or not the firing operation device 28 is in the firing operation, and the number display image G31 is displayed according to whether or not the firing operation device 28 is in the firing operation. The value to be added to the acquired number may be changed at one update timing. For example, even if the values to be added to the acquired number are the same, the number display image G31 is updated once in the situation where the firing operation is performed rather than in the situation where the firing operation is not performed. The configuration may be such that the value to be added to the acquired number at the timing becomes a large value or a large value, or may become a small value or a small value. Note that a touch sensor that detects that the player is touching the firing operation device 28 is a configuration that can specify whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28. When the touch sensor is ON, it may be configured to specify that the firing operation is being performed. In addition to or instead of the configuration, the rotation operation amount of the firing operation device 28 may be specified. A configuration is provided in which a variable resistor for grasping the situation is provided, and when the detection result of the variable resistor corresponds to the result that the rotation operation amount is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, it is determined that the firing operation is performed. May be

<Further different form regarding number display production>
The target to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the number of game balls acquired in the opening/closing execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in a slot machine, if the number of remaining continuous games in an advantageous game state advantageous to a player such as an RT game, an AT game, or an ART game can increase in the middle of the advantageous game state, the remaining continuation is displayed as a number display effect It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an increase display effect that shows how the number of games increases is executed. The calculation processing for increasing display executed by the display CPU 72 to perform the increasing display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 57.

When a trigger for increasing the number of remaining games in the advantageous game state occurs, the increased display effect is started. When it is the start timing of the increase display effect (step S2101: YES), the division process of the target increase value is executed (step S2102). In the division processing of the target increase value, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous game state is divided by “100” which is a predetermined division value. There are multiple types of target increase values, and all of these multiple types of target increase values are set so that the quotient value when dividing by the division value is 8 or less, and when dividing by the division value. The quotient values of are set to be different from each other. Specifically, “50”, “100”, and “250” are set as the target increase values. When the target increase value is "50", the quotient is "0" and the remainder is "50" when the target increase value is "100". When the target increase value is "100", the result is divided by the division value. As a result, the quotient is "1" and the remainder is "0". When the target increase value is "250", the quotient is "2" and the remainder is "50" when divided by the division value.

When the division process of the target increase value is executed, the value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the quotient derived by the division process is stored in the work RAM 73 as the unit increase value (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value for increasing the display of the remaining number of continuing games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an increase display effect at one update timing of the display. Since the quotient of the result of division by the division value differs depending on the type of the target increase value as described above, the unit increase value also differs depending on the type of the target increase value.

After that, setting processing of the unit increment counter provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of times the display by the increase display effect is updated in the current increase display effect. In step S2104, the current target increase value is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division is set in the unit increment counter. For example, when the target increase value is "250", the unit increase value is "3", and when the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is "83" and the remainder is "1". In this case, "83" is set in the unit increment counter. As a result of dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value, when the remainder is 1 or more, the remainder is stored in the work RAM 73 as a residual value (step S2105).

When the process of step S2105 is executed or when it is the update timing of the increase display effect (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether the value of the unit increase counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). When the value of the unit increase counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increase value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). ). The total counter is a counter that determines the value when the remaining number of continuing games is displayed as the game number image, and the value stored in the total counter is displayed as the game number image. When the increased display effect is started, the number of remaining continuing games at that time is set in the total counter.

In step S2108, the unit increase value is added to the current value of the total counter, so that the value of the game number image is increased by the unit increase value from the current value. Then, the value of the unit increment counter is decremented by 1 (step S2109).

If the value of the unit increment counter is "0" (step S2107: NO), the remaining value is added to the total counter (step S2110: YES) on condition that the remaining value is stored in the work RAM 73 (step S2110: YES). Step S2111). As a result, the value of the game number image is increased from the current value by the remaining numerical value.

When the process of step S2109 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S2110, or the process of step S2111 is executed, the image data corresponding to the value of the total counter is grasped as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2112). Then, the parameter information applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 includes the image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current value of the total counter as the game number image as the drawing target. Is set. Further, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

According to the above configuration, when the effect of increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state is executed, the unit increase value fluctuates according to the target increase value. Therefore, the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games. In this case, it is possible to diversify the increase mode of the number of games at each update timing of the number-of-games image.

In addition, even when diversifying the manner of increasing the number of continuous games in this way, the processing configuration for determining the unit increment value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increment counter, and the game number image are displayed. The processing configuration for updating is constant regardless of the target increase value. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Also, since the unit increase value is set according to the target increase value, it is possible to make the player predict the target increase value by checking the unit increase value. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the mode of updating the game number image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the increased display effect.

Note that a plurality of types of division values may be prepared when the division process of the target increase value (step S2102) is performed, and the division process may be executed using the division value determined by the lottery. In this case, even if the target increase value is the same, it is possible to diversify the increase mode of the game number at each update timing of the game number image when the target increase value is added to the continuous game number.

<Structure for performing simulated video production>
Next, a configuration for performing the pseudo moving image effect will be described.

The pseudo moving image effect is an effect in which the moving image display is executed on the symbol display device 41 over the pseudo moving image effect period. In the pseudo moving image production period, a specific update number (for example, 600 times) occurs in which the image update timing at which at least a part of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed is a plurality of times. At each update timing of the image in the pseudo moving image rendering period, one piece of still image data 171 to 173 targeted for use at the update timing is rendered to the entire frame areas 82a and 82b to be rendered. An image based on the one still image data 171 to 173 is displayed on the entire symbol display device 41. In this case, the number of still image data 171-173 to be used in the pseudo moving image rendering period is smaller than the specific update count.

More specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 stores the first character image data 171 and the effect image data 172 as the still image data 171 to 173 for executing the pseudo moving image effect. , Second character image data 173 are stored in advance. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59A, the first character image data 171 includes a first pseudo moving image character G42 representing a person and a first pseudo moving image character G42 as a first character image G41. The second pseudo moving image character G43 representing a person different from the above, and the pseudo moving image background G44 displayed on the back side of the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image character G43. Image data to be displayed on the entire screen. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

In the effect image data 172, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 59(b), as the effect image G45, a light ray image G47 showing a state in which light is emitted from the light source to the surroundings in front of the effect background G46 is displayed. Image data for displaying an image on the entire pattern display device 41. The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing the visual effect, and in addition to the light ray image G47, an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, and an aura representing as if the surroundings of the character are emitting light. Examples include images. The effect image G45 is an image created using software for creating an image.

As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 59(c), the second character image data 173 includes a first pseudo moving image character G42 and a second pseudo moving image character G42 as the second character image G48, as in the first character image G41. 2 This is image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G43 and the pseudo moving image background G44 on the entire symbol display device 41. The second character image G48 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

However, the display modes of the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image character G43 by the second character image data 173 are the same as the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image by the first character image data 171. This is different from the display mode of the working character G43. Specifically, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, which is a partial region of the first pseudo moving image character G42, the orientation of the body region representing the body, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, and the like are determined by the first character. The image G41 for the character and the image G48 for the second character are different. Further, the shape of the hand region that is a part of the second pseudo moving image character G43, the shape of the hand region that represents the body, the orientation of the body region that represents the body, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, and the like are included in the first character image G41. And the second character image G48 are different.

Between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, there is no continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42, and similarly in the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43. There is no. The fact that the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42 is not continuous means that the shape of a predetermined region such as the hand region of the first pseudo moving image character G42 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined region and the first pseudo. It means that the relative position of the moving image character G42 with respect to the other area is different from the mode at the update timing of the next image assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41. Similarly, the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is not continuous, the shape of a predetermined region such as the hand region of the second pseudo moving image character G43 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined region. It means that the relative position between the second area and the other area of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is different from the mode at the update timing of the next image assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41.

The second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed is set between the first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed and the third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed. As a result, for each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, as compared with the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. The pseudo moving image characters G42, G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the third display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42, G43 inconspicuous. As a result, the number of the character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 do not have continuity in the motion, while using the character image data 171 and 173. It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display of the moving image characters G42 and G43 is being performed.

In the first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed, in the second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed, and in the third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed, image update timings occur multiple times. The display periods are the same as each other. In the configuration in which the image update timing occurs a plurality of times in each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the image data 171-173 to be used in each display period has one type as already described. Only. However, in each display period, the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each of the image data 171 to 173, the drawing range in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b is sequentially changed. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the drawing range is different in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in each of the image data 171 to 173.

When drawing data is created in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the VDP 76, the data is written in all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800×600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are larger than the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the size stored in the memory module 74. It is the number of pixels. The range in which the image data 171 to 173 of the initial magnification can be drawn is larger than the frame regions 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. As a result, it is possible to make different the range to be drawn in one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period. Further, even in the structure in which the range to be drawn in the one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used is different, the one type of image data 171 to 173 is used in the entire pattern display device 41. It is possible to display an image corresponding to.

The sizes of the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 stored in the memory modules 74 are the same. The aspect in which the range to be drawn in each of the image data 171 to 173 is different is the same in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, the range of the image data 171 to 173 to be used that is closer to the predetermined corner side is set as the range to be drawn. Then, at a subsequent image update timing, a change mode of the drawing target range is changed so that the drawing target range gradually moves toward the opposite corner side with respect to the predetermined corner angle. It is set.

Data for changing the drawing target range is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as a pseudo moving image table 174, as shown in FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving image table 174. As shown in FIG. 61, the pseudo moving image table 174 has pointer information that is a serial number set therein, and drawing range information that determines a range to be drawn corresponding to each pointer information. .. The pointer information is set for the number of image update timings that occur in each display period. Thereby, it is possible to derive the drawing range information corresponding to all update timings by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174 in each display period. In addition, since the pseudo moving image table 174 is also used in each display period, the pseudo moving image table 174 is stored in advance as compared with the configuration in which the pseudo moving image table 174 is prepared in advance corresponding to each display period. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the storage.

FIG. 62 is a time chart showing how the pseudo moving image effect is executed. 62(a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62(b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62(c) shows the third display period, and FIG. 62(d) is used in each display period. It shows that the range of the drawing target of the target image data 171 to 173 is changed.

As the pseudo moving image effect is started at the timing of t1, the first display period is started as shown in FIG. 62(a). Then, the first display period continues from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, and in the meantime, as shown in FIG. 62D, the range to be drawn in the image data 171 for the first character is It is gradually changed with a certain direction.

At the timing of t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(a), and the second display period starts as shown in FIG. 62(b). Then, the second display period is continued from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, and in the meantime, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the range to be drawn in the effect image data 172 is in a fixed direction. It is gradually changed while having sex. This directionality and the amount of deviation of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period.

At the timing of t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(b), and the third display period starts as shown in FIG. 62(c). Then, the third display period is continued from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and in the meantime, as shown in FIG. 62D, the range to be drawn in the second character image data 173 is It is gradually changed with a certain direction. The directionality and the amount of deviation of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as those in the first display period and the second display period.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo moving image effect will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for the pseudo moving image effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the pseudo moving image effect is executed by the calculation process for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the pseudo moving image effect is to be executed.

When it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). It should be noted that the display CPU 72 reads an execution target table for controlling the overall flow of the pseudo moving image effect from the memory module 74 when starting the pseudo moving image effect. The display period is identified, and the start timing of each display period is identified.

When it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process of step S2203 is executed, the first character image data 171 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2204). Further, the drawing range information set in the pseudo moving image table 174 in association with the pointer information which is the current reference target is grasped (step S2205). Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2206). S2207).

When the calculation process for the pseudo moving image production is executed as described above, the first character image data 171 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). To be done. Further, the parameter information grasped in steps S2205 and S2206 is set in the drawing list.

When it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). If it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read in the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to “0”. (Step S2210). As a result, the drawing range information set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 is used at the start timing of the second display period.

When a negative determination is made in step S2209, or when the process of step S2210 is executed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2211). Further, the drawing range information set in the pseudo moving image table 174 in association with the pointer information which is the current reference target is grasped (step S2212). Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2213), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2213). S2214).

When the calculation process for the pseudo moving image production is executed as described above, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). In addition, the parameter information acquired in steps S2212 and S2213 is set in the drawing list.

When it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). When it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read in the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to “0”. (Step S2216). As a result, the drawing range information set in association with the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 is used at the start timing of the third display period.

When a negative determination is made in step S2215, or when the processing of step S2216 is executed, the second character image data 173 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2217). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information which is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2218). Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2219). S2220).

When the calculation process for the pseudo moving image production is executed as described above, the second character image data 173 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). To be done. Further, the parameter information grasped in steps S2218 and S2219 is set in the drawing list.

Here, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are individually used in an effect different from the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used as display images of round effects executed during different round games in the opening/closing execution mode which is the high frequency winning mode. .. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a round effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The round effect calculation process is executed by the effect calculation process of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the round effect should be executed.

If it is the first round game execution period (step S2301: YES), the first character image data 171 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2302), and other image data is used as the image data to be used this time. Understand (step S2303). Then, the parameter information applied to these image data is grasped (step S2304). When the arithmetic processing for round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is ascertained in the first character image data 171 and step S2303. The image data is set as the drawing target. Further, the parameter information ascertained in step S2304 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the eighth round game execution period (step S2305: YES), the second character image data 173 is grasped as the image data used this time (step S2306), and other image data is used this time. (Step S2307). Then, the parameter information applied to these image data is grasped (step S2308). When the calculation processing for round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is ascertained in the second character image data 173 and step S2307. The image data is set as the drawing target. Further, the parameter information acquired in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

If it is not the first round game or the eighth round game, other processing is executed (step S2309). In this case, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are not selected as the image data to be used.

As described above, the second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed is set between the first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed and the third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed. ing. As a result, for each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, as compared with the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. The pseudo moving image characters G42, G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the second display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42, G43 inconspicuous. As a result, the number of the character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 do not have continuity in the motion, while using the character image data 171 and 173. It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display of the moving image characters G42 and G43 is being performed.

In particular, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are image data prepared for displaying images for round effects in different round games, respectively. The continuity of the movements of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 between the image G41 and the second character image G48 is not required. In this case, as described above, by causing the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 with the display period of the effect image G45 interposed therebetween, an image for the round effect is displayed. By using the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 prepared for displaying, it is possible to execute a pseudo moving image effect.

The drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame regions 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is changed at each update timing. Accordingly, it is possible to display a moving image while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

The pseudo moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame regions 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is also used in each display period. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing the required storage capacity in the memory module 74.

<Another form related to pseudo-video production>
The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which there are only two types of the character image data 171 and 173 for displaying the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43, and there may be a configuration in which there are three or more types. For example, in addition to the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173, the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed and the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 are pseudo. The image data for the third character that makes the display modes of the moving image characters G42 and G43 different may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, as the pseudo moving image effect period, the first display period in which the first character image data 171 is used, the second display period in which the effect image data 172 is used, and the second character image data 173 are set. There is a third display period to be used, a fourth display period to be used for effect image data 172 or effect image data different from it, and a fifth display period to be used for third character image data. Will be done.

Each display period of the pseudo moving image production is not limited to the configuration in which the display periods are the same as each other. The display periods may be different periods, but may be substantially the same period. At least one of the display periods may be a period that is significantly different from the other display periods. For example, although the first display period and the second display period are the same or substantially the same period, the effect period may be longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. When the display periods are different from each other, the pseudo moving image table 174 is created so as to correspond to all the update timings of the display period which is the longest period among the display periods, so that the pseudo moving image table 174 can be displayed in other display periods. The pseudo moving image table 174 can be used also.

If the drawing range information derived by the pseudo moving image table 174 has continuity between the start timing and the end timing, it is determined that the pseudo moving image table 174 is used a plurality of times in one display period in the pseudo moving image production. There is no sense of discomfort. In this case, it is not necessary that data corresponding to the entire one display period is set in the pseudo moving image table 174, and it is sufficient that only data corresponding to a part of the one display period is set. is there.

The first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are larger than the frame regions 82a and 82b in the size of the initial magnification stored in the memory module 74. The size of the initial magnification is not limited, and is the same as or smaller than the frame areas 82a and 82b, and is enlarged to be larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b after being read from the memory module 74. The configuration may be such that processing is executed. In this case, when it is used to display the image for the round effect, the image data for the first character 171 and the image data for the second character 173 are used at the size of the initial magnification, and the image for the pseudo moving image is displayed. When used for displaying, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 may be used in a size enlarged from the size of the initial magnification.

A method for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect at each update timing is to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173. It is not limited to the method of changing the range. For example, a method of gradually narrowing the drawing target range in the image data 171 to 173 so that the display target image is gradually enlarged may be displayed. In addition, a method may be used in which the range of the drawing target in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually widened so that the image of the display target is gradually reduced and displayed.

The first character image data 171 is not limited to the configuration in which only the first character image data 171 is the image data to be used in the first display period of the pseudo moving image production, and the first character image data 171 is framed in the first display period. After drawing in the areas 82a and 82b, another image data may be drawn in a partial range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Even in this case, the first character image G41 is displayed behind the other image data, and the effect image G45 is displayed between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48. By displaying it, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the moving image by each of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 is being displayed.

<Further different forms related to simulated video production>
-Aspects shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) are also conceivable as aspects of the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(c), the pseudo moving image character G51 is displayed in the pseudo moving image effect. The first pseudo moving image data and the second pseudo moving image data are prestored in the memory module 74 as the image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51, and the first pseudo moving image data is used. As a result, the first pseudo moving image G52 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(a), and the second pseudo moving image data is used as the second pseudo moving image G52 as shown in FIG. 65(c). The pseudo moving image G53 is displayed.

In the first pseudo moving image G52, a state before the predetermined portion G51a (specifically, both arms) of the pseudo moving character G51 moves along a predetermined motion path is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65(c), the pseudo moving image G53 displays the state after the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving character G51 has moved along the predetermined motion path. However, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 is so large that it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of the movement. ..

On the other hand, during the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53, the pseudo moving effect image G54 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b). .. In this pseudo moving image effect image G54, a large number of small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. Further, the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed for a predetermined period, and a large number of small individual images G54a are displayed in the moving direction along the predetermined movement path in the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 during the predetermined period. A moving image is displayed so that it moves in the same direction as.

With the above configuration, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 makes it difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. Even if they are separated by a certain degree, the visual effect of the movement of the small individual image G54a in the pseudo-moving effect image G54 causes a visual effect between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53. It is possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined part G51a has moved along the predetermined movement path. Accordingly, even if the number of pseudo moving image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51 is small, the predetermined portion G51a between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 is formed. It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image of the pseudo moving image character G51 is being displayed while not making the discontinuity of the position of (3) inconspicuous.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the electrical configuration relating to display control is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this embodiment.

The configuration shown in FIG. 66 includes a main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 has a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, a power supply function that supplies electric power to each device including the main control device 50, and a drive power control that drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the special figure unit 37 for displaying the result of the game times, and the general figure unit 38 for displaying the result of the general electric open lottery are electrically connected. Further, a voice light emission control device 60 that drives and controls the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and the command transmitted from the voice light emission control device 60 is further added. A display control device 200 for controlling the symbol display device 41 on the basis is provided.

As shown in FIG. 66, the display control device 200 includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 201 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected to an input port 207 mounted on the display control board 206 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 via the input port 207. To be done.

The display CPU 201 is connected to the work RAM 202, the memory module 203, and the VRAM 204 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on the command received from the voice light emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 201 is connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60, a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41. To do. The memory module 203, the work RAM 202, the VRAM 204, and the VDP 205 will be described below.

The memory module 203 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, as well as various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 203 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is well executed. In addition, the memory module 203 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 203 includes object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data attached to the object data, and the backmost surface in the image for one frame. And image data for the back surface that constitutes the image of FIG.

Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture data is an image to be attached to each polygon of the object data, and by attaching the texture data to the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a design or a character is generated. The texture data may be held in any manner, but for example, it includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The method of holding the image data for the back side is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. By the way, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-like object data (that is, plate polygon) is used.

The work RAM 202 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 203 and transferred, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to retain the memory, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is well executed. The work RAM 202 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203. Then, the display CPU 201 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 204 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 204 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to the SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is well executed. Further, the VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 204 includes a development buffer 211, and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203. Further, the VRAM 204 is provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205.

The VDP 205 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 211 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 201. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 205 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing a drawing-specific firmware.

In detail, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation unit 221, a rendering unit 222, a register 223, and a display circuit 225. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 and the I/F 227 for the VRAM 204.

The I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201 in the register 223. The geometry calculation unit 221 reads out various image data stored in the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223. The geometry calculation unit 221 also arranges the object data designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 221 executes various coordinate conversion processing when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

The rendering unit 222 determines the appearance of the object data by performing light source adjustment and pasting texture data on each clipped object data based on the drawing list stored in the register 223. In addition, the rendering unit 222 projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and also performs various adjustments based on the depth information to frame one-frame drawing data that is two-dimensional data. Created in the buffer 212. The drawing data for one frame means the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

The geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may have a configuration in which all the control programs for operating are provided by a drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is incorporated in the VDP 205, and the control program and the rendering list are included. The geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be configured to execute processing depending on the contents of the above. Alternatively, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 203. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame area 212a and a second frame area 212b are provided. Each of these frame areas 212a and 212b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 212a and 212b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 212 is provided with the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b, in the situation where drawing on the symbol display device 41 is being executed using drawing data created in one frame area. , Drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 212.

The display circuit 225 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 212a or the second frame area 212b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 225. It is output to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 208. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 212a and 212b to the display circuit 225. The transferred drawing data is resolution-adjusted by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41, and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. The display circuit 225 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

<Basic processing in display CPU 201>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing in this embodiment. In the V interrupt process, if this time is the start timing of power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S2401: YES), all the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. It is read to the texture area 211a (step S2402).

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or if the processing of step S2402 is executed, command analysis processing is executed (step S2403). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives the strobe signal from the sound-light side MPU 62, the display CPU 201 executes the command interrupt process regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interruption processing, the command received at the input port 207 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 202.

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S2404: YES), the command corresponding process is executed (step S2405). In the command handling process, the execution target table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203. The execution target table is an information group in which processing required to display an image for one frame at each image update timing is displayed when a moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. is there.

As the command received by the display CPU 201 from the sound-light side MPU 62, as in the first embodiment, a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of notice production, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, There are a command for starting the fixed effect, a command for starting the standby display, a command for starting the fixed display and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effect for game play corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 41 is read.

If a negative determination is made in step S2404, or if the processing of step S2405 has been executed, task processing is executed (step S2406). In the task processing, the VDP 205 is instructed to draw in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time by referring to the control data of this processing time in the data table set as the usage target. Set the various data required above. As the various data, specifically, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is stored in the memory module 203, the address information of the area to which the image data of the control target is transferred in the VRAM 204, and the image data of the control target are used. There is information on the target frame areas 212a and 212b for which drawing data is to be created, and various information for creating a 3D image using the virtual three-dimensional space.

Then, the drawing list output process is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to this drawing list.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the task processing of step S2406.

In the task process, first, a control start setting process is executed (step S2501). In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 201 at the current processing time is executed. An individual image is a 2D image defined by still image data such as rear image data or a 3D image defined by a combination of image data for objects and image data for textures. That is.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for control start, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing time. If it exists, it searches the work RAM 202 for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and makes a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. To secure a free buffer area. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the control start parameters are set for the initialized free buffer areas according to the individual image.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). This control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in one frame of images after the current processing.

After that, the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2503). In the background calculation processing, the coordinates of the background image, which constitutes the background image, and the background character, the rotation angle, the scale, the light information for adding and contrasting the light, and the projection are calculated. A process for calculating and deducing various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information for performing and Z test designation is executed.

After that, the production calculation process is executed (step S2504). In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is performed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

After that, the symbol calculation process is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for the image of the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game.

By the way, in each process of steps S2503 to S2505, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S2501 is executed. Further, in each processing of steps S2503 to S2505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image in accordance with a specific pattern each time the image update timing comes. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance and is transferred to the work RAM 202 in advance by the time the display CPU 201 needs to read it.

After that, the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the grasping process of the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images which are the control update targets by the processes of steps S2503 to S2505 described above. To execute. The grasping is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

In other words, the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 is set to be larger than that of the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, so the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 201 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 205 may be the same, and in this case, the process of step S2506 is executed. There is no need.

<Basic processing in VDP 205>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 205 will be described.

In the VDP 205, a process of setting the value of the register 223 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 201, a process of generating drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 212a and 212b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 226 for the display CPU 201. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222. The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be described. 69(a) to 69(c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information is set with the information of the target buffer, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b is to be created for one frame of the image related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information.

In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system at the time of creating the drawing data this time are set, and further information on the drawing order of each image data, The parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number numerical information, and the parameter information is set so as to correspond to each numerical value information in a one-to-one relationship.

In the drawing list of FIG. 69(a), the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. There is. In addition, the image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the object A for effect is set as m-th, the object for effect B is set as m+1-th, and so on. There is. Further, as the order after the image data for these effects, the image data for symbols is set, for example, the object A for symbols is set as the nth, the object for symbols B is set as the n+1th, and so on. There is.

Note that the order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the set order may be the reverse of the above. Image data for effect or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for symbols is set in order between the image data for predetermined effect and the image data for other effects. It may have been done.

Parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),..., P(m), P(m+1),..., P(n), P(n+1),. , Multiple types of parameter information are set. Regarding the parameter information P(1) of the image data for the back side, specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the information of the address of the area where the image data for the back side is stored in the memory module 203, and the back side Information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the background, and the world coordinate when setting the image data for the back surface Rotation angle information that indicates the rotation angle in the system, scale information that indicates the magnification when setting the world coordinate system for the scale that is set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, and Information of a uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when setting the image data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the vertices of the object data. Further, the information on the coordinates is set for the object data but not for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state of being attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 205 when performing texture mapping.

In the parameter information (P1), the camera information including the coordinate and orientation information of the virtual camera when the back-side image data is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for rendering, and the back-side image data are rendered. Light information including information on the position and orientation of a virtual light source that determines the shade in a case is set.

In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of hidden surface erasing method, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z-axis when many objects and two-dimensional images are overlapped in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. Is sequentially processed by referring to the distance from the viewpoint, and the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set to the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b.

In addition to the Z buffer method, a Z sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment that sequentially sets, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, the numerical information set for each pixel to the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition processing of these numerical information and the calculation processing for fusion are executed. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when the effect image is displayed.

In the parameter information (P1), α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and fog designation information indicating whether fog is applied and an application target are set.

Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of designating the uniform α value and a method of designating the α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in the memory module 203 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Since the α value and the α data are uniformly set as described above, the transparency of the two-dimensional still image data and the texture data is not finely controlled in pixel units, but is uniformly controlled for all pixels. In a good situation, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with uniform α values, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog and the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a fixed manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if a fog similar to other objects is applied to an object arranged on the back side in the Z-axis direction, and a texture is not obtained due to being too dark, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. This makes it possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while preventing the above texture from being impaired.

For other parameters such as the parameter information P(2), as shown in FIG. 69(c), instead of the information of the back image data, the information of the object and the texture of the various information of FIG. 69(b) are used. Information and are set. As these pieces of information, information on addresses of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 203 is set.

Drawing processing in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how the drawing data is created as the drawing process is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

First, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed (step S2602).

In the setting process for the background, out of the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. After that, the memory module 203 grasps and reads the address where the image data is stored, and at the same time, the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data is set so that the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale are designated in the drawing list. The world conversion processing for converting the coordinate value into the coordinate value of the world coordinate system is executed, and is set in the secured buffer area.

If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. Further, in the background setting process, the control ending process is executed to erase the background image data not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

After that, setting processing for production is executed (step S2603). In the effect setting process, the object data for displaying the effect image among the image data specified in the drawing list this time is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If they are arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control ending process is executed to delete the image data for effect that is not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

After that, a setting process for symbols is executed (step S2604). In the design setting process, the object data for displaying the design is grasped from the image data designated in the drawing list this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If they are arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control ending process is executed to erase the image data for symbols not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

As a result of the processes of steps S2602 to S2604 being executed, as shown in FIG. 71, it is specified as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the backmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales that are also designated by the drawing list is completed. Note that FIG. 71 simply shows a state in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

After that, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint are determined by the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin of the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, the viewpoint PC11 shown by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. .. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of description, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

After that, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S2606). In the conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted to a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

After that, clipping processing is executed (step S2607). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is recognized with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the drawing target frame areas 212a and 212b (that is, the pattern display device 41), the individual images extracted in step S2606. Clipping.

After that, the writing process is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and the shadow, reflection, etc. of each object extracted by the clipping process are calculated based on the virtual light source. ..

After that, a color information setting process is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process for pasting texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping process is executed. Further, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping is executed.

Then, in steps S2610 and S2611, each individual image extracted in step S2607 and further subjected to the lighting process and the color information setting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). Or parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, a rendering and background drawing data creation process is executed (step S2610). In the rendering data creation processing for the background and the background, the image data for the backmost image and the object data set as the background image are projected onto the screen area PC12 while the hidden surface is erased, and Create drawing data for. Further, the object data set as the effect image is projected onto the screen area PC12 while the hidden surface is being erased, thereby creating the drawing data for effect.

Here, the VRAM 204 is provided with a screen buffer 214 as shown in FIG. 66, and the background drawing data and the effect drawing data are collectively written in the screen buffer 214 for the effect and the background. A buffer and a buffer for symbols into which drawing data for symbols are written are set. In addition, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the effect and background buffers and the pattern buffer. The background drawing data and the effect drawing data created in step S2610 are stored in the effect and background buffers so that the effect drawing data is overwritten in a part of the background drawing data. Written. If the image data for the background is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the background is not created. If the image data for the effect is not specified in the drawing list, the effect for the effect is specified. No drawing data is created.

After that, a drawing data creation process for symbols is executed (step S2611). In the drawing data creation process for symbols, the object data set as symbols is projected onto the screen area PC12 while the hidden surface is being erased, so that the buffer for symbols in the screen buffer 214 is used for symbols. Create drawing data. If the drawing image data is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the design is not created.

After that, the drawing data composition process is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data synthesizing process, the rendering data for the effect and the background, which are individually created in the screen buffer 214 by the processes of step S2610 and step S2611, and the drawing data for the pattern are synthesized, and the synthesized result is obtained. It is written as drawing data for one frame in the drawing target frame areas 212a and 212b.

In this case, the order of writing is defined such that the drawing data for the effect and the background→the drawing data for the pattern are arranged in this order from the back side to the front side. Therefore, in the drawing target frame areas 212a and 212b, first, the drawing data for the effect and the background is written, and then the drawing data for the symbol is written. At this time, when the α value of complete transparency is set for the pixel for which drawing is performed, the image on the back side is used as it is, and when the α value of semitransparent is set, the α value is changed. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the standard ratio, and if the opacity α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. , Blending operations are executed.

By the way, each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, but a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion in the drawing data for a pattern, which is not projected.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing that is one frame later for the corresponding frame. Further, the display circuit 225 has a selector circuit which alternately switches the frame regions 212a and 212b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the switching of the selector circuit causes the drawing data of the drawing data to be changed. The frame areas 212a and 212b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

Note that steps S2602 to S2607 are processes executed by the geometry computing unit 221, and steps S2608 to S2612 are processes executed by the rendering unit 222.

<Structure for performing time-based performance>
Next, a configuration for performing the time corresponding effect will be described.

The time-corresponding effect is an effect in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-corresponding effect state for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) every time a predetermined time is reached. It is conceivable that the predetermined time is set to have an hour interval such as 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock, 12 o'clock, and so on. Further, regarding the time-corresponding effect state, specifically, a time-corresponding background image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 are also time-corresponding. It becomes a mode. Also, in the case of a time corresponding performance state, the special correspondence image can be displayed in the game times that result in the jackpot, or the probability that the special correspondence image is displayed in the game times that results in the jackpot is time corresponding to the time. It will be higher than in the case where it is not in the performance state. By setting the pachinko machine 10 in a performance state corresponding to the time at a predetermined time, for example, when a plurality of the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are set. With, it becomes possible to perform the time corresponding effect at the same time.

In order to enable execution of the time corresponding effect, the sound emission control device 60 is provided with the RTC 65 as shown in FIG. 66. The RTC 65 can output time information to the sound-light side MPU 62. The RTC 65 has its own backup power supply, and can manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The sound-light side MPU 62 can specify whether or not the time at the acquisition timing is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect by acquiring the time information from the RTC 65 as necessary. Then, when the time information acquired from the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time-corresponding effect, the sound-light side MPU 62 executes the process for starting the time-corresponding effect.

How the time-corresponding effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. 72(a) shows a normal period which is a period in which the time corresponding effect is not executed, FIG. 72(b) shows a preparation period which is a part of the execution period of the time corresponding effect, and FIG. 72(c) shows The special period which is a part of the execution period of the time corresponding production and is started after the preparation period is shown. Further, FIG. 73(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the normal period, and FIG. 73(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the preparation period. FIG. 73C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the symbol display device 41 during the special period.

As shown in FIG. 72A, the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 at the timing of t1 in the normal period in which the time corresponding effect is not executed becomes the time information corresponding to the start timing of the time corresponding effect. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the normal period ends and the preparation period starts at the timing of t1. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73(a) to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b). ..

In the display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, the contents of the backmost image displayed in the background image are different and the type of the background individual image displayed in front of the backmost image Is different. Specifically, while the number of background individual images G61a and G61b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period is two, the background individual images G62a to G62a-displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period are displayed. The number of G62d is four. As a result, the display period of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy in the preparation period than in the normal period, and the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. In the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 for notifying information corresponding to the remaining time until the special period is started is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed by the subtraction formula. This allows the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. Although the symbol display mode is the same in the normal period and the preparation period, the symbol display mode may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 72B and 72C, the preparation period ends and the special period starts at the timing of t2. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period shown in FIG. 73(b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period shown in FIG. 73(c). ..

In the display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period, the content of the backmost image displayed in the background image is different and the type of the background individual image displayed in front of the backmost image Is different. Specifically, while the number of background individual images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period is four, the background individual image G64a to G62a to G62a to G62a displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period are displayed. There are seven G64g. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy in the special period than in the preparation period, and the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. Further, in the special period, the special notification image G65 for notifying that it is the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the player to clearly recognize that it is the special period. Although the symbol display mode is the same in the preparation period and the special period, the symbol display mode may be changed.

At the timing of t3, which is the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72(c) and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72(a). .. After that, the time-corresponding effect is executed at each of the timing t4 to the timing t6 and the timing t7 to the timing t9. In this case, the period from the start of the time corresponding effect in a predetermined execution time to the start of the time corresponding effect in the next execution time is fixed at Tf1. Further, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period in the execution times of each time corresponding effect is also constant at Tf2. Accordingly, it is possible to simultaneously start the time-corresponding effect in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 and simultaneously start the special period in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

As described above, the time-corresponding effect is regularly executed by using the time information of the RTC 65. However, when the time-corresponding effect start timing comes in the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode continues. While the background image of the symbol display device 41, the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed, and further, as a background image of the symbol display device 41 The rearmost image for the period and the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are not displayed. However, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the image for the opening/closing execution mode from the front, and in the special period, a part of the image for the opening/closing execution mode is displayed in the foreground. The special notification image G65 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the above. As a result, by preferentially executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the player can be made aware that the time corresponding effect is being executed while the player's satisfaction with respect to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is appropriately increased. It is possible to make them recognize. Further, even in the open/close execution mode, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to understand that the execution period of the time-corresponding effect is originally set, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are compared, and the RTC 65 is abnormal. It becomes possible to perform the work for confirming whether or not the occurrence has occurred regardless of whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker unit 45 become the mode corresponding to the time from the start timing of the time corresponding effect even in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker section 45 can be aligned in a time-corresponding manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

If the opening/closing execution mode ends in the situation where the start timing of the time corresponding effect is started in the opening/closing execution mode and the time corresponding effect is originally being executed, the end timing corresponds to the preparation period. If there is, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are started as the background images of the symbol display device 41, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. Further, if the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the special period, the back image for the special period and the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are used as the background images of the symbol display device 41. The display is started and the display of the special notification image G65 is continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the time-corresponding effect in the original execution mode is executed.

The maximum duration of the open/close execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. As a result, when the start timing of the time corresponding effect is reached in the open/close execution mode, the open/close execution mode ends during the execution time of the time corresponding effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the time-corresponding effect in the original execution mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the longest duration of the opening/closing execution mode may be longer than the execution period of the time corresponding effect.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the game turning effect is being executed, the time is applied in the situation where the game turning effect is not being executed and the opening/closing execution mode effect is not being executed. The start mode of the time-corresponding effect is different from that at the time when the effect starts. Specifically, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game diversion is being executed, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 74, the background image, effect image, and pattern image are up to that point. The display mode of the game diversion effect is continued. That is, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not started as the background images of the symbol display device 41. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the background image displayed as the effect for game play from the front. By the way, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap the design so as not to reduce the visibility of the design.

Hereinafter, the manner in which the time-corresponding effect is executed in relation to the execution status of the game diverting effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 75(a) shows the start timing of the time-corresponding effect, and FIG. 75(b) shows the execution period of the demo display executed in a situation where neither the game time effect nor the opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. 75(c) shows the execution period of the effect for game use, FIG. 75(d) shows the preparation period, and FIG. 75(e) shows the image display as shown in FIG. 74 during delay. 75(f) shows a display period of a preparation period image in which an image as shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed as a background image, FIG. 75(g) shows a special period, and FIG. (H) shows the light emission control period corresponding to the time.

First, a case will be described in which the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is generated in the situation where the effect for game play and the effect for opening/closing execution mode are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), at the timing of t1 in the execution period of the demo display, as shown in FIG. 75(a), it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding effect. In this case, at the timing of t1, the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75(d), and the display of the preparation period image is started as shown in FIG. 75(f). Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting unit 44 starts the light emission in the manner corresponding to the time. Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t1.

Then, at the timing of t2 which is in the middle of the preparation period, the effect for game play is started as shown in FIG. 75(c). In this case, the variable display of the symbols is started in the state where the background image for the preparation period is displayed. That is, the variable display of the symbols is started in a state where the background image for the preparation period is continuously displayed in a mode according to the display pattern up to that point.

Then, at the timing of t3 which is in the middle of execution of the game re-use effect, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state where the variable display of the symbols according to the display pattern so far is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing of t4, which is the situation where the demo display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75(b). The special period ends, and accordingly, the time-corresponding effect of the current execution end ends. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the light emission by the display light emitting unit 44 in the manner corresponding to the time is finished. Note that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t4. In addition, when the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed in the situation where the game use effect is being executed, the game use effect is finished and the game use effect is newly started. The special period ends when the demo display starts.

Next, a case where the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is started in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), at the timing of t5 in the execution period of the effect for game play, it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding effect as shown in FIG. 75(a). In this case, at the timing of t5, the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75(d), but the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b) is not started. , The delaying period is started as shown in FIG. In the delaying period, as already described, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while the image display of the effect for game play by the display pattern until then is continued.

On the other hand, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting unit 44 starts the light emission in the manner corresponding to the time. Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t5. As a result, the display mode of the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker section 45 can be aligned in a time-corresponding manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(c), at the timing of t6, the effect for game use that has been executed until then is finished, and at the timing of t7, a new effect for game use is started. At the timing of t7, the delaying period ends as shown in FIG. 75(e), and the display of the background image for the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(f). In other words, if the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached during the execution of the game game effect, the background image for the preparation period is not displayed as the delaying period until the game game effect ends, When the effect for game use is finished and a new effect for game use is started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started. Further, when the effect for game use is finished and a new effect for game use is not started, the background image for the preparation period is started when the demo display is started. As a result, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started during the period from the end of the game use effect to the start of the new game use effect or the start of the demo display. It becomes possible to use it as a control period for doing. The demonstration display is started when 0.5 sec has elapsed without starting a new game turning effect or opening/closing execution mode effect after the game turning effect was finished.

After that, at the timing of t8 which is in the middle of execution of the game repurpose, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state where the variable display of the symbols according to the display pattern so far is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing of t9, which is the situation where the demo display is being performed as shown in FIG. 75(b). The special period ends, and accordingly, the time-corresponding effect of the current execution end ends. At the timing of t9, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 is ended as shown in FIG. Note that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t9.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed as described above, for the background image, effect image, and pattern image, the display mode of the effect for game use up to that time is continued. On the other hand, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the background image displayed as the effect for game play from the front. As a result, it is possible to let the player recognize that the time corresponding effect is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for game reuse.

In particular, when trying to start the display of the background image for the preparation period in a situation where the reach character image for reach is displayed as the effect for game play, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a possibility that the number of types of image data used for will extremely increase and the processing load will become extremely high. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed, only the remaining time notification image G63 is added, and it is already determined as the effect for game use. The display of the image according to the content is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

Here, the duration Tf3 of the preparation period is constant, and the duration Tf3 is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the game production effect. As a result, even if the start timing of the time corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game turning is being executed, regardless of the variation display time of the effect for game turning and the start timing of the time corresponding effect, The effect for game diversion during execution is finished before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period is started.

When the special period is started by securing the period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. 73C from the start timing thereof. It becomes possible to start displaying. As a result, it becomes possible to easily start the display of the background image for the special period on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time.

Next, a data structure for executing the time corresponding effect will be described.

As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 76( a ), a data table 231 for time-based production is stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 63. The data table 231 for time-based effect is a table that is referred to in the sound-light side MPU 62 for performing execution control of the time-based effect. FIG. 76(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data table 231 for the time-based effect.

Pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in the data table 231 for the time-corresponding effect, and various timing information, light emission data, and sound output data are associated with each pointer information. The combination is set. By referring to various timing information corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target, the start timing of the preparation period, the transfer timing of the image data group 233 for the special period, the end timing of the preparation period, the start timing of the special period It is possible for the sound and light side MPU 62 to specify the return timing of the image data group for normal effect and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period. Further, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed by executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 using the light emission data (PD(0), PD(1)...) Corresponding to the pointer information which is the reference target. It becomes possible to set the light emission mode to the time-corresponding mode, and the sound output data (SD(0), SD(1)...) Corresponding to the pointer information which is the reference target is used to output the speaker unit 45. By executing the sound output control, it becomes possible to set the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 to the mode corresponding to the time.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, in the memory module 203 of the display control device 200, the image data group 232 for the preparation period, the image data group 233 for the special period, the remaining time correspondence table 234, and the preparation period table 235. The special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 are stored in advance. The image data group 232 for the preparation period includes image data for displaying the backmost image for the preparation period, image data for displaying the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period, and the remaining time notification. Image data for displaying the image G63 is included. The image data group 233 for the special period includes image data for displaying the backmost image for the special period, image data for displaying individual background images G64a to G64g for the special period, and a special notification image. Image data for displaying G65 is included.

The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for controlling the display of the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period regardless of whether it is the delay period, and is stored in each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Correspondingly, parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set. The preparation period table 235 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the preparation period in the preparation period which is not the delay period, and corresponds to each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame, and prepares. Parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the period is set. Since the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are separately provided, display control for the preparation period is performed in the delay period in which the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even in the preparation period. By referring only to the remaining time correspondence table 234, it becomes possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed. On the other hand, in the preparation period and the period other than the delay period, the remaining time notification is made in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235. The image G63 can be displayed.

The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for controlling the display of the special notification image G65 during the special period regardless of whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, and is stored in each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Correspondingly, parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set. The special period table 237 is data for displaying and controlling the background image for the special period in the special period which is not the open/close execution mode, and corresponds to each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame, Parameter information to be applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the special period is set. By providing the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 separately, in order to perform the display control for the special period even during the special period, the background image for the special period is not displayed. By referring only to the special notification correspondence table 236, it is possible to display the special notification image G65 in a situation where the background image for the special period is not displayed. On the other hand, in a situation in which the special period is not in the open/close execution mode, the special notification is performed in a situation in which the background image for the special period is displayed by referring to both the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237. The image G65 can be displayed.

As already explained, the special period will end when the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed, but when the game time effect is being executed or the opening/closing execution mode effect is being executed. When the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed, the effect for game use during the execution or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode ends and the effect for game use newly starts. If the demo display is started or the demo display is newly started, the process ends. Then, when the special period ends, the normal effect is restored. In response to this, the special period table 237 is set to correspond to a period longer than the longest period during which the special period can continue. As a result, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, the special period can be continued until the end timing occurs.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the time corresponding effect will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the RTC-compatible processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 62. The RTC-compatible process is executed by the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If it is the start timing of the preparation period (step S2701: YES), the setting process for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the setting process for starting the preparation period, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, the data table 231 for time-corresponding effect is read from the sound-light side ROM 63 to the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S2801). After that, a read instruction command for the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the command handling process executed by the display CPU 201. The command handling process is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives the read instruction command for the preparation period data (step S2901: YES), the data other than the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. It is transferred (step S2902). Note that the texture data of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the time of starting the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201. By executing the process of step S2902, regardless of whether or not the delay period is started when the preparation period is started, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is stored in the VRAM 204 at the start of the preparation period. It is in a state of being read by the expansion buffer 211. This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period.

Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current state is the delay target state (step S2803). The situation in which the game turning effect is being executed or the situation in which the opening/closing execution mode effect is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. When it is the delay target situation (step S2803: YES), “1” is set to the delaying flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S2804). The delaying flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 62 to specify that it is a delay period. After that, the delay command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the delay command (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the remaining time correspondence table 234 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). As a result, the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is started on the symbol display device 41.

Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79 ), if the present condition is not the delay target condition (step S2803: NO), “1” is set to the preparation display flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 64. (Step S2806). The preparation display flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 62 to specify that the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. After that, the preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S2905: YES), the display CPU 201 executes the preparation period read processing (step S2906). In the read-out process for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 has already been read out to the work RAM 202, the preparation period table 235 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 so that the work RAM 202 corresponds to the remaining time. It is assumed that both the table 234 and the preparation period table 235 have been read. In the read process for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is not read to the work RAM 202, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. .. By reading both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 into the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

Returning to the description of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78 ), if it is during the preparation period (step S2703: YES), the setting process during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81, there is neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3001 and step S3002: NO), and the delay flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 is set. When "1" is set (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether it is the delay release timing (step S3004). When a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect in the situation where the game-use effect is being executed, the game-use effect ends and a new game-use effect is created. When is started or when the demo display is started, it is determined that it is the delay release timing. In addition, when the delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time corresponding effect in the situation where the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game is played. When the diversion effect is started or the demo display is started, it is determined that it is the delay cancellation timing.

If it is the delay cancellation timing (step S3004: YES), the delay flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3005), and the preparation display flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to "1" ( Step S3006). After that, the preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing contents of the display CPU 201 when the preparation display start command is received are as already described.

In the setting process during the preparation period, when it is determined that it is the data transfer timing based on the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect (step S3002: YES), the read instruction command of the special period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 ( Step S3008). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the read instruction command for the special period data (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 stores the data other than the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period in the memory module. The data is transferred from 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). Note that the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supplying the operating power to the display CPU 201. By executing the processing in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period has been read into the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 by the time the special period starts. This makes it possible to start displaying the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 early at the start of the special period, and to update the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 during the special period. It becomes possible to carry out smoothly.

Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 81) during the preparation period, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the preparation period based on the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect (step S3001: YES), the sound-light side RAM 64 is being delayed. The flag and the preparation display flag are cleared to "0" (step S3009), and the special period flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 62 to specify that it is a special period. After that, the special period start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2909). S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 to the work RAM 202, the display of the special notification image G65 is started on the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether the open/close execution mode is set or not. Further, in the situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not set, the display of the background image for special effects is started on the symbol display device 41.

Returning to the explanation of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78 ), if it is during the special period (step S2705: YES), the setting process during the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, when it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), whether it is the data return timing based on the time corresponding performance data table 231. Is determined (step S3102). When it is determined that it is the data restoration timing (step S3102: YES), a read instruction command for normal period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the normal period data read instruction command (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 displays the background image for the normal effect in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed. Data other than the texture data in the image data group for performing the transfer is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 82) during the special period, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period based on the data table 231 for the time-corresponding effect (step S3101: YES), It proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the time corresponding effect to the normal effect. The resumable status is the end timing of the execution period when the demo display is performed at the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period, and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period. When the effect for game play or the effect for open/close execution mode is being executed, the effect for game play or the effect for open/close execution mode in the middle of execution is finished and the effect for game play is newly started. This is the timing when the display is started or the demo display is started.

When it is in the recoverable state (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and the sound output control for the special period are ended (step S3105). Accordingly, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 in the normal effect mode in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed and the speaker unit 45 in the normal effect mode in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed are performed. Sound output control is restarted. After that, the special period flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3106), and the special period end command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period end command (step S2913: YES), the table for displaying the background image for the normal effect in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed. Is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). As a result, the display of the background image for the special period is ended on the symbol display device 41, and the display of the background image for the normal effect is restarted. In the command handling process, when another command is received, the corresponding process is executed (step S2915).

Next, the table setting process in the present embodiment executed by the sound-light side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 83. Note that the table setting process is performed in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). To be executed.

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game is specified, and the identification is performed. The written information is written in the sound-light side RAM 64.

After that, when the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the fluctuation display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect (step S3203: YES), the lottery process for determining the type of the reach effect. The selection process of the lottery table used in is executed. Regarding the selection process of the lottery table, specifically, when "1" is set in the preparation display flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S3204: YES), the preparation period lottery table is set to the sound-light side ROM 63. To the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S3205). When "1" is set to the special period flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S3206: YES), the special period lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 63 to the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S3207). .. When "1" is not set in either the preparation display flag or the special period flag (step S3206: NO), the normal period lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 63 to the sound-light side RAM 64. Then, the reach effect lottery process is executed by using the lottery table selected as the current use target among the lottery table for the preparation period, the lottery table for the special period, and the lottery table for the normal period (step S3209). In the reach production lottery process, the value of the reach lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the obtained value is collated with the lottery table selected as the target of use this time. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value obtained from the reach lottery counter is obtained as the result of the reach production lottery process this time.

Here, a plurality of types of reach effects are set, and each reach effect differs in the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image on the symbol display device 41. The difference in processing load occurs according to the type of image data and the size of the image data used to display the reach effect image. In the reach effect, a large load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is the largest, and a medium load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is smaller than that of the large load effect. , A small load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is smaller than the medium load effect. In this case, the normal period lottery table includes all of the large load effect, the medium load effect, and the small load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected. On the other hand, the preparation period lottery table does not include the large load effect and the medium load effect as the types of the reach effects to be selected, but includes the small load effect. Further, the special period lottery table does not include a large load effect but a medium load effect and a small load effect as types of reach effects to be selected.

Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period as described above, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than that in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect in the special period. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the heavy load effect is displayed while displaying the background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

When starting the special period, it is necessary to initialize the world coordinate system for all the image data necessary for displaying the background image for the special period. Therefore, compared with the case where the special period is updated, the VDP 205 The processing load of is increased accordingly. On the other hand, in the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the heavy load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effects. As a result, even if a transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the game re-use production started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is during the execution of the large load production and the medium load production. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large from occurring.

As described above, the execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as a game play effect. As a result, even if a heavy load effect or a medium load effect can be executed as the reach effect in the game use effect that is started in the normal period, the reach effect ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, as already described, the heavy load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the game use effect started in the preparation period. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load effect or the medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large from occurring.

In addition, the special period lottery table includes a reach effect in which a special corresponding image is displayed as a reach effect that can be selected in the game times that result in the jackpot, and the normal period lottery table and the preparation period lottery table are included. The reach effect in which the special correspondence image is displayed is not included. As a result, it is possible to set an effect that occurs only during the special period.

When a negative determination is made in step S3203, or when the processing of step S3209 is executed, the stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S3210). The content of the stop symbol determination process is the same as step S407 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

After that, the control pattern table setting process is executed (step S3211). In the setting process of the control pattern table, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S3209) when the reach effect occurs, and the combination of the result of the stop symbol determination process (step S3210) are corresponded. The control pattern table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

After that, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S3212). In the processing, information on the fluctuation display time of the current game is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the specified fluctuation display time information is provided in the sound-light side RAM 64. Set to the variable time counter. The fluctuation time counter is a counter for identifying the timing at which the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is ended and the fixed display of the symbol is started in the sound light side MPU 62 in the current game time. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 each time the sound interrupt MPU 62 starts the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

Then, the variation pattern command including the information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). As a result, the display CPU 201 starts the game-use effect on the symbol display device 41, and advances the game-use effect in a manner in accordance with the effect content determined by the sound-light side MPU 62. In this case, when it is determined that the reach effect is generated in the current game time, the reach effect selected in step S3209 is executed by the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, in addition to the processes described above, other processes are executed in step S3214. The contents of the other processes are the same as those in step S415 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

As described above, when the time information of the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect, the time-corresponding effect is started. As a result, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect when the predetermined time comes. In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, it is possible to simultaneously start the time-corresponding effect with the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

In this case, when the time-corresponding effect is started, the preparation period first occurs, and when the preparation period elapses, the display content of the image on the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy than the preparation period. Period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the special period is about to occur, and it is possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation that the special period will occur. Further, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and in the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the special period is started is displayed in the subtraction formula. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed, while the display mode of the effect for use for game use is continued for the background image, effect image, and pattern image, the game is played. The remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on a part of the background image displayed as the diversion effect. As a result, it is possible to let the player recognize that the time corresponding effect is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for game reuse.

In particular, when trying to start the display of the background image for the preparation period in the situation where the reach character image for reach is displayed as the effect for game play, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a risk that the number of types of image data used for will extremely increase and the processing load will become extremely large. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed, only the remaining time notification image G63 is added, and it is already determined as the effect for game use. The display of the image according to the content is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

The duration of the preparation period is constant, and the duration is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the game production effect. As a result, even if the start timing of the time corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game turning is being executed, regardless of the variation display time of the effect for game turning and the start timing of the time corresponding effect, The effect for game diversion during execution is finished before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period is started.

By thus securing the period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed, when the special period starts, it is possible to start displaying the background image for the special period from the start timing. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to easily start the display of the background image for the special period on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time.

Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than that in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect in the special period. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the heavy load effect is displayed while displaying the background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

When starting the special period, it is necessary to initialize the world coordinate system for all the image data necessary for displaying the background image for the special period. Therefore, compared with the case where the special period is updated, the VDP 205 The processing load of is increased accordingly. On the other hand, in the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the heavy load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effects. As a result, even if a transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the game re-use production started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is during the execution of the large load production and the medium load production. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large from occurring.

The execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game play. As a result, even if a heavy load effect or a medium load effect can be executed as the reach effect in the game use effect that is started in the normal period, the reach effect ends by the end timing of the preparation period. And, in the production for game play started in the preparation period, the large load production and the medium load production are not selected. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load effect or the medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large from occurring.

Whether the display light emitting unit 44 emits light in a time-corresponding manner and the speaker unit 45 outputs sound in a time-corresponding manner at the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is in the middle of execution of the game time effect. It starts regardless. As a result, when the start timing of the time corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed, the background image for the preparation period on the symbol display device 41 is displayed until the effect for the game use is finished. Even if the contents of the background images in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are not aligned due to the delay in the display, the light emission contents of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output contents from the speaker unit 45 are not related to the plurality of pachinko machines. It is possible to start them simultaneously in the machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time-corresponding effect has been started all at once on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

<Another form for time-based performance>
-In the preparation period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is the display for the preparation period. The configuration may be an aspect, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display aspect corresponding to the preparation period. Further, in the special period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is for the special period. The configuration may be a display mode, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special period.

When the execution period secured as the special period has passed in the situation where the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo, a predetermined time (for example, 3 sec) has passed from the timing when the execution period has passed. The special period may end and the normal effect may be restored. In this case, it is possible to restore the image data group for normal effect to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 by using the predetermined time, and set the image data group for normal effect to the world coordinate system. It is possible to make initial settings for

-If the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed in the situation where the game use effect is being executed, the open/close execution mode effect is executed subsequently to the game use effect. Alternatively, the special period may be ended when the effect for game play is ended. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long time.

It is not limited to the configuration in which the RTC 65 is used to specify the start timing of the time-corresponding effect. The elapsed time may be measured and the sound-light side MPU 62 may be specified as the start timing of the time-corresponding effect when the measured elapsed time is the time corresponding to the generation cycle of the time-corresponding effect. ..

All of the texture data is not read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supply of operating power to the display CPU 201, but when it becomes necessary to use it, the texture data to be used is The configuration may be read each time. In this case, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period are read in step S2902 in the command handling process (FIG. 80), all of the image data group 233 for the special period are read in step S2908, and in step S2912. All of the image data group for displaying the background image for normal effect will be read.

In the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 84, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the partition display area G66 set in a part of the symbol display device 41, and the area other than the partition display area G66 In, the background image for the preparation period may be displayed. This makes it possible to emphasize and display that it is the preparation period.

In the preparation period, new start of the game reproduction effect may be restricted, and the restricted state may be released when the special period is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special period from starting during the execution of the game repurpose.

・If neither the production for game play nor the production for opening/closing execution mode is executed at the start timing of the time corresponding effect, the special period is started without passing through the preparation period, and the time corresponding When the production start timing is reached and the production for game play or the production for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the production period is during the preparation period while the production is being executed. The special period may be started when it ends.

At least one of the time-corresponding light emission control period in the display light-emitting unit 44 and the time-corresponding sound output control period in the speaker unit 45 is after a predetermined second has elapsed with respect to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect in the symbol display device 41. The configuration may be started. In this case, it is preferable that the target control period that is started after the predetermined seconds have elapsed be started before the special period is started in the symbol display device 41.

<Further different forms related to time-based production>
In the present mode, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game turning or the effect for opening/closing execution is being executed, the effect for game turning or opening/closing execution mode which is being executed The images for the preparation period, including the remaining time notification image G63, are not displayed at all until the production for the game is finished. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for producing the action will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the setting process for starting the preparation period in the present another embodiment.

First, the data table 231 for effect corresponding to time is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). After that, a read instruction command for the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). As a result, similarly to the above embodiment, the display CPU 201 transfers the data other than the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Note that the texture data of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the time of starting the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201.

After executing the processing of step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current status is the delay target status (step S3303). The situation in which the game turning effect is being executed or the situation in which the opening/closing execution mode effect is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If it is the delay target situation (step S3303: YES), "1" is set to the delay flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S3304).

When the present situation is not the delay target situation (step S3303: NO), "1" is set to the preparation display flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S3305). After that, the duration for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the display for preparation is calculated (step S3306). Since the preparation period is started at the start timing of the time-corresponding effect this time, the continuation period of the preparation display is the time from the start timing of the time-corresponding effect to the start timing of the special period. Then, the information corresponding to the preparation display duration calculated in step S3306 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound-light side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparation display start command is displayed in the display CPU 201. It is transmitted (step S3308).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the command handling process according to this another embodiment. When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 grasps the remaining preparation period from the preparation display start command (step S3402). Then, in the case of performing the subtraction display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 from the fixed start value (for example, “60”) to the fixed end value (for example, “0”) within the remaining period of the preparation period. The update cycle of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed start value, and while the count value update cycle and the count value subtraction value (specifically, “1”) in one update cycle are made constant, An update cycle of the count value necessary for the count value to be a fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period is calculated. Then, the preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). As a result, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated in accordance with the update cycle calculated in step S3403. In the command handling process, processes other than the above processes are also executed.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the setting process during the preparation period in this another embodiment.

If neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3501 and step S3502: NO) and the delay flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3503: YES), the delay It is determined whether it is the release timing (step S3504). When a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect in the situation where the game-use effect is being executed, the game-use effect ends and a new game-use effect is created. When is started or when the demo display is started, it is determined that it is the delay release timing. In addition, when the delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time corresponding effect in the situation where the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game is played. When the diversion effect is started or the demo display is started, it is determined that it is the delay cancellation timing.

If it is the delay release timing (step S3504: YES), the delay flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3505), and the preparation display flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3506). After that, the duration for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the display for preparation is calculated (step S3507). Since the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time-corresponding production this time, the remaining period until the start timing of the special period is the continuation period of the preparation display. Then, information corresponding to the preparation display duration calculated in step S3507 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound-light side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparation display start command is displayed in the display CPU 201. It is transmitted (step S3509). As a result, by performing the processing of step S3402 to step S3404 already described in the command corresponding processing (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201, the remaining time notification image G63 is counted in the remaining period of the preparation period as already described. The value is subtracted from the fixed start value until it reaches the fixed end value.

The processing contents of steps S3510 to S3513 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3008 to S3011 in the setting process (FIG. 81) during the preparation period in the above-described embodiment.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game turning or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed as described above, for the effect for the game turning or the opening/closing execution mode during the execution thereof The display of the images for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect of is finished. As a result, for example, in the situation where the expectation for a jackpot result is increasing due to the execution of the predetermined reach effect, the display of the image for the preparation period is suddenly started, and the predetermined reach effect is displayed. It is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the degree of attention of the player from decreasing.

Further, in the configuration in which the display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect for the game play or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode which is being executed in this way is completed, When the effect for game play or the effect for open/close execution mode is finished and the image for the preparation period is started, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is related to the remaining continuation period of the preparation period. The update cycle is set. As a result, even when the display of the image for the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time corresponding effect, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is fixed from the fixed start value. It can be performed until the end value is reached.

<Structure for performing another storage effect>
Next, a configuration for performing another storage effect will be described.

The separate storage effect is that the drawing data created by projecting the three-dimensional image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is stored as separate storage data, and then the separate storage data is stored. Is set as a plate-shaped object data to be placed in the world coordinate system, and the other saved data is projected together with other image data placed in the world coordinate system onto the virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. It is an effect of displaying an image by doing. Also, during the period in which the image is displayed using the drawing data created based on arranging the separately stored data in the world coordinate system, the object to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane when the separately stored data is created. With respect to the three-dimensional image data, the mask control is performed to exclude the image data from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. The image data excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane in the mask control may not be arranged in the world coordinate system, and the arrangement position and shape of the object arranged in the world coordinate system is updated. Instead, it may be configured to be excluded from the projection target. As described above, by executing the drawing data creation using the separately stored data and the mask control, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 even when the types of images to be displayed increase. Becomes

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the specific content of another storage effect, and FIGS. 88(a1) and 88(b1) show a state in which three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system. 88(a2) and 88(b2) show the contents of an image displayed using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

In the situation where the separate storage effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 88(a1), the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the position on the farthest side when the viewpoint PC11 is used as a reference, and the image data 241 at the back is placed in front of it. The image data 242 for one background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged, and further the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the front side. The backmost image data 241 is image data in which the texture data for the backmost surface is attached to the plate object data (that is, plate polygon). The plate-like object data is object data having no thickness, and has a smaller data capacity and a smaller processing load at the time of geometry calculation and rendering in the VDP 205, as compared with three-dimensional object data having thickness.

As shown in FIG. 88(a1), projection data is created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane in the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88(a1). It is possible to display such an image for one frame on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 is further displayed in front thereof. Then, between the update timings of the plurality of images, the arrangement position and shape of the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character in the world coordinate system, etc. It is possible to change the display positions and shapes of the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 in the image for one frame.

In the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88(a1), the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image data 242, and the second background individual image image data By performing the projection process on the virtual two-dimensional plane while setting the image data 244 for the effect character as the projection target while the projection target is 243, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and It is possible to create the two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of the still image of the second background individual image G73 as the first separate storage data. By pasting the first separately saved data to the plate-shaped polygon data, the first separately saved image data 245 is arranged in the world coordinate system, and the image data 244 for the effect character and the image for the additional individual image are provided in front of it. By arranging the data 246, the state shown in FIG. 88(b1) is obtained. In this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the effect character image data 244 and the additional individual image image data 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 88(b2) on the symbol display device 41. In the image for the one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are further displayed in front thereof. Is displayed.

However, since the image data for displaying the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is arranged in the world coordinate system as a still image using the first separate saved image data 245, a plurality of image data of The arrangement positions and shapes of the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 cannot be individually changed between update timings. On the other hand, the image data for displaying the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are individually arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. It is possible to individually change the arrangement positions and shapes of the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between the image update timings.

When drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245 as described above, the first separate saved image data 245 is the backmost when the first separate saved image data is created in the world coordinate system. Image data 241, image data 242 for the first background individual image, and image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged on the front side of the positions. Then, the space MS1 on the inner side of the first separate saved image data 245 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. Thus, when drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245, a virtual two-dimensional image is displayed to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. The number of image data to be projected on the plane is reduced, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G73 is reduced. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

By executing the mask control, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in the situation, parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information about the image data 241 to 243 is stored and held in the work RAM 202. Thus, when the image data is returned to the period in which the image is displayed by projecting the image data 241 to 243 on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the work RAM 202 is provided with an area for updating the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243. There is no need to execute the processing for doing. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, an initial process such as a process of searching a storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and a process of clearing the storage area searched by the search process are performed. It becomes necessary to execute the setting process, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. In such a situation, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 which is the target of the mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load of the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released becomes extremely large. It becomes possible to prevent becoming.

Further, the display CPU 201 executes the mask control, so that the image data 241 to 243 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by the mask control. The updating process of the parameter information regarding the image data 243 for the second background individual image 242 and the second background individual image is continued. As a result, immediately after the end of the period in which the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is displayed, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed from the state immediately before the start of the period. The movement is not resumed, but the display state immediately before the start of the period is changed from the state in which the change of the movement is continued for the duration of the period according to the display pattern so far to the first background individual image. It is possible to restart the movements of G72 and the second background individual image G73.

Further, by executing the mask control, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, the VRAM 204 holds the buffer area in which the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored. Thus, when the image data 241 to 243 are projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane to return to the period for displaying the image, information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is displayed. There is no need to execute the process for allocating the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute a storage area search process of the VRAM 204 and an initial setting process such as a clear process of the storage area searched by the search process, which is the target of the mask control. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 in the VRAM 204 as they are, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

Here, when it is necessary to create another saved data by using the image data excluded from the projection target by the mask control in the situation where the mask control is executed, the image data is excluded from the projection target. Therefore, it is not possible to create another saved data using the image data. A case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c). 89(a1) to 89(c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 89(a2) to 89(c2) project onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. The contents of the image displayed by using the drawing data created in (3) are shown below.

As shown in FIG. 89(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the innermost position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are arranged in front of it. 89 is generated, and drawing data is created by projecting onto the virtual two-dimensional plane in a state in which the image data 243 of FIG. An image for one frame as shown in (a2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of the image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89(a1) is saved as the second separate save data.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(b1), the second separate storage data is pasted to the plate-shaped polygon data to be arranged as the second separate storage image data 247 in the world coordinate system, and the second separate storage image data 247 is arranged. The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. Then, the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, so that one frame as shown in FIG. 89(b2) is generated. The image can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. The effect image data 248 is data in which the texture data for the effect image is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data, and the effect image data 248 is set to a transparent or translucent α value and is opaque. Since the α value is not set, the effect image data 248 is overwritten on the second separate saved image data 247 in a state in which the transparentization process or the translucency process is performed.

When the drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247 as described above, the second separate saved image data 247 is the backmost when the second separate saved image data is created in the world coordinate system. Image data 241, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, and image data 244 for the effect character are arranged on the front side. Then, the space MS2 on the inner side of the second separate saved image data 247 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. As a result, when drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 are displayed. Therefore, the number of pieces of image data to be projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G74 is reduced. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

However, immediately after the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247, the first separate saved image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image as shown in FIG. 88(b1). When it is necessary to display an image using the image data 246 for the background, during the period in which the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247, the rearmost image data 241 and the first background are displayed. Since the mask control is executed on the image data 242 for the individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be created. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(c1), the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be arranged behind the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system. As shown in FIG. 88(c2), the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed while the background image is not displayed. Further, for example, not only the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system, but also the image data 241, the image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the second background individual image If the drawing data is created by arranging the image data 243 for the image and projecting all the image data 241 to 244, 246 on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the processing load of the VDP 205 increases. As a case where such a situation occurs, in the pachinko machine 10, an operation corresponding effect in which an image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247 when the operation device for operation 48 is operated occurs. In the configuration described above, there may be a case where it is necessary to display an image using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the operation corresponding effect is finished.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display the image using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. It is composed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 90, the manner in which another storage effect is performed will be described. FIG. 90 is a time chart showing how another storage effect is performed. FIG. 90(a) shows a normal drawing period in which mask control is not executed, and FIG. 90(b) shows a mask control period in which mask control is executed. 90(c) shows the timing at which at least one of the first separate save data and the second separate save data is executed separately, and FIG. 90(d) shows that the first separate save data is provided in the VRAM 204. 90E shows the period stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251, and FIG. 90E shows the period in which the second separate storage data is stored and stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 provided in the VRAM 204. 90(f) shows the operation valid period of the effect operation device 48, FIG. 90(g) shows the operation timing of the effect operation device 48, and FIG. 90(h) shows the execution period of the operation corresponding effect.

First, the case where an image is displayed using the first separate saved image data 245 will be described.

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90A, the timing of t1 is the storage execution timing of the first separate storage data as shown in FIG. 90C. In this case, the first separate storage data is created as shown in FIGS. 88A and 88B, and the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204. As a result, as shown in FIG. 90D, the first separate storage image data 245 is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 at the timing of t1.

After that, at the timing of t2, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is set, and the period for performing the mask control as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b) is set. .. In this case, even during the period in which the mask control is performed, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed in the first separate saved image data 245 respectively correspond to each other. The various parameter information about the image data 241-243 to be executed is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the updating process of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

After that, at the timing of t3, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, so that the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). It returns to the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even in the mask control period, the display CPU 201 of various parameter information about the image data 241-243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. Since the update processing in (1) is continued, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control was started.

Next, a case will be described in which the image is displayed using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. In addition, in the following description, FIGS. 91A to 91C are appropriately referred to. 91(a) to 91(c) are explanatory views for explaining a state in which an image display using the first separate saved image data 245 and an image display using the second separate saved image data 247 are performed. 91(a1) to 91(c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 91(a2) to 91(c2) project onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. The contents of the image displayed by using the drawing data created by

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90(a), the timing t4 is the start timing of the operation valid period of the production operation device 48 as shown in FIG. 90(f). In this case, another saving is executed at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 90(c). At the execution timing of the separate storage, both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are targets of the separate storage execution.

The manner in which both the first and second stored data are created will be described with reference to FIG. 91(a). As shown in FIG. 91(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the innermost position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are arranged in front of it. 91 and image data 243 of FIG. 91 are arranged, and the drawing data is created by projecting onto the virtual two-dimensional plane in the state where the image data 244 for the effect character is further arranged on the near side. An image for one frame as shown in (a2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, drawing data created by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91(a1) onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is stored in the second separate save buffer 252 as the second separate save data. R. The second separate storage data is data that enables the still image of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 to be displayed.

Further, in the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 91(a1), the rearmost image data 241, the first background individual image data 242, and the second background individual image By projecting the image data 243 onto the virtual two-dimensional plane without projecting the image data 244 for the effect character while projecting the image data 243, the rearmost image G71 and the first background individual Two-dimensional drawing data capable of displaying a still image of the image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is created as the first separate storage data. Then, the first separate storage data is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251.

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 90, the first separate save data and the second separate save data are created at the timing of t4, so that the first separate save buffer 251 is first stored in the first separate save buffer 251 as shown in FIG. 90D. The separately stored data is stored and held, and the second separately stored buffer 252 is stored and held as shown in FIG. 90(e).

After that, at the timing of t5, the operation device 48 for operation is operated as shown in FIG. 90(g), so that the operation corresponding effect is started as shown in FIG. 90(h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(b1), the second separate save data is attached to the plate-shaped polygon data and is arranged as the second separate save image data 247 in the world coordinate system, and the second separate save data is also included. Effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. Then, the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, so that one frame worth as shown in FIG. 91(b2) is generated. The image can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

By starting the operation corresponding effect at the timing of t5, the mask control is performed at the timing of t5 as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). In this case, even in the period in which the mask control is performed, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image that are the display targets in the second separate saved image data 247 are displayed. Various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to each G74 is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of these various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

Then, at the timing of t6, the operation-based effect is ended as shown in FIG. 90(h). In this case, the display of the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is started at the timing of t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(c1), the first separate saved data is attached to the plate-shaped polygon data and is arranged in the world coordinate system as the first separate saved image data 245, and is placed in front of it for the effect character. Image data 244 and image data 246 for additional individual images are arranged. Then, in this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(c2) on the symbol display device 41. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the update processing of the parameter information about the image data 244 for the effect character in the display CPU 201 is continued, so that the mask control is started for the display of the effect character image G74. It is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing.

The display of the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is started at the timing of t6, so that the mask control is continued as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the target of the mask control is the image data 241-243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image. The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not the targets of mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 which are the targets of the mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of these various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. It

After that, at the timing of t7, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, so that the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). It returns to the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even in the mask control period, the display CPU 201 of various parameter information about the image data 241-243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. Since the update processing in (1) is continued, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control was started. As a result, it becomes possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

Next, although both the first separately saved data and the second separately saved data are separately saved, the first separately saved image data 245 is used without displaying an image using the second separately saved image data 247. The case where the displayed image is displayed will be described.

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90(a), the operation valid period of the production operating device 48 becomes the start timing at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 90(f). In this case, as in the case of the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 90(c), it becomes the execution timing of the separate storage for both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90(d), the first separate storage buffer 251 stores and holds the first separate storage data, and as shown in FIG. 90(e), the second separate storage buffer 252 stores the first separate storage data. The two separate saved data are stored and held.

However, as shown in FIGS. 90(f) and 90(g), at the timing of t9, the operation valid period elapses without operating the production operating device 48. In this case, since the image is not displayed using the second separately saved image data 247, the mask control is not executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the first separate storage data to be used thereafter is created again. That is, the first separate save data created and stored in the first separate save buffer 251 at the timing of t8 is deleted, and the first separate save data created at the timing of t9 is stored in the first separate save buffer 251. It is newly stored. As a result, it is possible to display each of the images G71 to G73 in the display mode of the timing closer to the timing of using the first separate saved image data 245 as an image using the first separate saved image data 245. Become. The timing at which the first separate storage data is newly created is the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image for which the operation valid period has elapsed.

Thereafter, at time t10, the display of the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is started, and the mask control is started as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the target of the mask control is the image data 241-243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image. The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not the targets of mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 which are the targets of the mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of these various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. It

After that, at the timing of t11, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, so that the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). It returns to the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even in the mask control period, the display CPU 201 of various parameter information about the image data 241-243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. Since the update processing in (1) is continued, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control was started. As a result, it becomes possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing another storage effect will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for another storage effect executed by the display CPU 201. In addition, the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed by the background arithmetic processing of step S2503 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the game time in which the separate storage effect is to be executed.

First, by updating the pointer information that is the reference target in the execution target table read to the work RAM 202 in order to control the effect for the game use this time, the content of the reference target data in the execution target table is updated this time. Data corresponding to the processing times (step S3601). Then, when neither the execution of the operation corresponding effect nor the operation valid period is satisfied (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether it is the usage period of the first separate stored data (step S3604). The usage period of the first saved data is a game time in which the operation valid period does not occur and a game time in which another saving effect occurs, and occurs when the elapsed time of the game time reaches a predetermined time. In the case of a game game in which the operation valid period occurs, it occurs when the operation valid period elapses without executing the operation corresponding effect or when the operation corresponding effect ends.

If it is not the usage period of the first separate stored data (step S3604: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes the rearmost image data 241, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, and image data 244 for the effect character. After that, the parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost surface, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image. The derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 202 so as to correspond to each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3606 and S3607). After that, the non-use instruction information of the separate storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). If it is the time to create the first separate save data (step S3609: YES), the first create instruction information of the separate save data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

When the calculation processing for separate storage effect is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407), the various image data 241-244 grasped in step S3605. Is set as the placement target in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, non-use instruction information of separately stored data is set in the drawing list, and if this time is the generation timing of the first separately stored data, first creation instruction information of separately stored data is set.

When it is during the use period of the first separate save data in the calculation process for separate save effect (step S3604: YES), based on the currently set execution target table, the image data of the type corresponding to the update timing of this time is displayed. Understand (step S3611-step S3613). The image data includes the first separate save data stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost surface, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the image data 246 for the additional individual image, and the first The parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the separately stored data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in association with each of the image data 241 to 244 and 246 (steps S3614 to S3617). .. In this case, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not targets of arrangement in the world coordinate system, but these image data 241-244, The storage and holding of the parameter information about the H.246 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. After that, the use instruction information of the separate storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

When the calculation process for separate storage effect is executed as described above, the various image data grasped in steps S3611 to S3613 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). 241 to 244 and 246 are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. In addition, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 and 246 is set in the drawing list. In addition, use instruction information of separate storage data is set in the drawing list.

In the calculation process for another storage effect, if the operation is in the effective period (step S3603: YES), the process is performed in the operation effective period in step S3618, and if the operation corresponding effect is being performed (step S3602: (YES), and in step S3619, processing during operation corresponding effect is executed. The processing during the operation valid period and the processing during the operation corresponding effect will be described below.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the processing during the operation valid period.

When it is the start timing of the operation valid period (step S3701: YES), the second creation instruction information of the separate storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). When the process of step S3702 is executed, or when the operation device for production 48 is not operated at the start timing of the operation valid period (step S3701 and step S3703: NO), based on the currently set execution target table. , The type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S3704). The image data includes the rearmost image data 241, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, and image data 244 for the effect character. After that, the parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost surface, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image. The derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 so as to correspond to each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3705 and S3706). After that, the valid period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). If it is the end timing of the operation valid period (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separate storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

When the processing during the operation valid period is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407), the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3704 are stored in the world. It is set as the placement target in the coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, effective period information is set in the drawing list, and if this time is the start timing of the operation effective period, second creation instruction information of separate storage data is set, and this time is the end timing of the operation effective period. For example, the first creation instruction information of separately stored data is set.

When the effect operation device 48 is operated in the process during the operation valid period (step S3703: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3703: YES). S3710 and step S3711). The image data includes the second separate save data and the effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate saved data are stored. The parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 and 248 (steps S3712 to S3715). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241, the image data 241 for the backmost background, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. The storage and holding of the parameter information of the image data 241-244 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. Then, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

When the calculation processing for separate storage effect is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407), the various image data grasped in steps S3710 and S3711 248 is set as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the process during effect production for operation.

First, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S3801 and step S3802). The image data includes the second separate save data and the effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate saved data are stored. The parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 and 248 (step S3803 to step S3806). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241, the image data 241 for the backmost background, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. The storage and holding of the parameter information of the image data 241-244 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. Then, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

When the calculation process for separate storage effect is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407), the various image data grasped in steps S3801 and S3802 248 is set as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for the separate storage display executed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for separate storage display is executed as a part of the setting process for background performed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). Further, when non-use instruction information of separate storage data, use instruction information of separate storage data, effective period information, or operation-corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, the setting processing for separate storage display is executed.

If the use instruction information of the separately stored data is not set in the drawing list this time, and the operation corresponding effect information is not set in the drawing list this time (step S3901: NO), based on the drawing list this time, The rear side image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, the second background individual image image data 243, and the effect character image data 244 are grasped as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system (step S3902). .. Further, the parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the drawing list this time (step S3903). Then, the setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed with the parameter information grasped this time applied to the image data 241-244 to be arranged (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(a2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the use instruction information of the separately stored data is set in the drawing list this time (step S3905: YES), the first separately stored data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image based on the drawing list this time. Of the image data 246 is grasped as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system (steps S3906 to S3908). Further, the parameter information applied to the first-classified storage data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image is grasped based on the drawing list this time (step S3909). Then, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the first stored data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(c2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list this time (step S3905: NO), the second separate storage data and the effect image data 248 are grasped as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list this time. (Steps S3910 and S3911). Further, the parameter information applied to the second separately stored data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the drawing list this time (step S3912). Then, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed with the parameter information grasped this time being applied to the second separately stored data and the effect image data 248 (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(b2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the drawing data creation process for separate storage display executed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 96. The drawing data creation processing for separate storage display is executed as a part of the rendering data and background drawing data creation processing executed in step S2610 of the drawing processing (FIG. 70). When non-use instruction information of separately stored data, use instruction information of separately stored data, effective period information, or operation-corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, the separately stored display drawing data creation processing is executed. R.

When the first creation instruction information of the separate storage data or the second creation instruction information of the separate storage data is set in the drawing list this time (step S4001: YES), the backmost image data 241 and the first background individual image The first separate storage data is created by projecting the image data 242 and the image data 243 for the second background individual image on the virtual two-dimensional plane (step S4002). Then, the created first separate save data is written in the first separate save buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251.

When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process of step S4002 is executed, drawing data for displaying one of the images in FIGS. 91(a2), 91(b2), and 91(c2) is created. Yes (step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data combining process of step S2612 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) to display the image of one frame.

After that, when the second creation instruction information of the separate save data is set in the drawing list this time (step S4005: YES), the drawing data created in the immediately preceding step S4004 is set as the second separate save data in the second of the VRAM 204. The data is written in the separate storage buffer 252 (step S4006). As a result, the second separate storage data is stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252. Further, since the drawing data used for displaying the image for one frame is used as it is as the second separate storage data, it is possible to suppress the processing load for creating the second separate storage data.

As described above, when the image is displayed by using the first separate storage data, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while executing the mask control. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 is reduced, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target. , It is possible to prevent the processing load on the VDP 205 from increasing. When an image is displayed using the second separate storage data, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, the second background individual image image data 243, and the effect character are displayed. It is possible to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 while performing the mask control on the image data 244 for use. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 is reduced, and the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target. Even if it is done, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing.

The parameter information of the image data excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control is stored and retained in the work RAM 202 without being erased. As a result, when the image data is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane to return to the period in which the image is displayed, the process for ensuring the area for updating the parameter information of the image data in the work RAM 202 is executed. You don't have to. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, an initial process such as a process of searching a storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and a process of clearing the storage area searched by the search process are performed. It becomes necessary to execute the setting process, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data to be mask-controlled is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load of the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released becomes extremely large. It is possible to prevent that.

Further, the display CPU 201 performs the update process of the parameter information on the predetermined image data even if the predetermined image data is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane due to the mask control. continue. As a result, immediately after the end of the period in which the image is displayed using the first separately stored data or the second separately stored data, the movement of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data from the state immediately before the start of the period. Is not restarted, but the display state immediately before the start of the period is changed to the predetermined image data from the state in which the change in movement is continued for the time period during which the period is continued according to the display pattern until then. It is possible to restart the movement of the corresponding image. As a result, it becomes possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

Further, by executing the mask control, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, the VRAM 204 holds the buffer area in which the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored. Thus, when the image data 241 to 243 are projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane to return to the period for displaying the image, information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is displayed. There is no need to execute the process for allocating the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute a storage area search process of the VRAM 204 and an initial setting process such as a clear process of the storage area searched by the search process, which is the target of the mask control. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 in the VRAM 204 as they are, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

If the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored data may occur immediately after the period for displaying the image using the second separate stored data ends, the image using the second separate stored data is displayed. Before the period to be started is started, not only the second separately stored data but also the first separately stored data is created. As a result, even if the mask control is executed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data during the period in which the image using the second separate storage data is displayed, the second separate storage data is generated. It is possible to display the image using the first separate stored data immediately after the period for displaying the image using the stored data ends.

Further, even if the first separate storage data is created before the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is started, the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is If the mask control is not executed for the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data due to the non-occurrence, the first data is displayed immediately before the image display using the first separate storage data is started. Separate storage data is newly created. As a result, it is possible to display each of the images G71 to G73 in the display mode of the timing closer to the timing of using the first separate stored data as an image using the first separate stored data.

<Another form related to another preservation effect>
-Instead of the configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored and held when the operation valid period is started, the first separate storage data is stored at a predetermined timing before the operation valid period is started. And one of the second separately stored data is stored and held, and the other separately stored data is stored at a timing after the predetermined timing and before the start of the operation valid period or at the start timing of the operation valid period. It may be held. In this case, it is possible to disperse the processing load as compared with a configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored and held in the same processing cycle.

When the mask control is executed, the image data targeted for the mask control is not arranged in the world coordinate system. Instead, the image data targeted for the mask control is also arranged in the world coordinate system. However, it may be configured to be excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. In this case, when the mask control is completed, it is not necessary to execute the process for re-arranging the image data, which is the execution target of the mask control, in the world coordinate system. Further, in the configuration, the image data that is the target of the mask control may be a target of arrangement in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information applied to the image data in the VDP 205 may not be changed. However, it is preferable to continue updating the parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201.

-Instead of the configuration in which the display CPU 201 continuously updates the parameter information regarding the image data that is the target of the mask control, the parameter information in the display CPU 201 is updated regarding the image data that is the target of the mask control. The configuration may not be performed. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data that was the target of the mask control is restarted from the display state of the image corresponding to the separate storage data. Even in this configuration, it is preferable that the work RAM 202 stores and holds the state in which the parameter information to be mask-controlled is stored during the mask control.

The separately stored data to be separately stored in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. The mask control configuration may be applied to a configuration in which one type of separate storage data is used.

<Structure for performing angle display production>
Next, a configuration for performing the angle display effect will be described.

The angle display effect uses a plurality of types of moving images that allow display objects whose movements change over time to be viewed from different angles, and is used until then based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. This is an effect in which the target of use is changed to a video with a different angle from the target video. Specific display contents of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b). As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), in the angle display effect, the photographed image is displayed as a moving image. In this live-action image, a person is displayed as the live-action character image G81, and the moving state of the real-action character image G81 is displayed as a moving image. Further, FIG. 97(a) corresponds to a moving image of a person in the live-action character image G81 taken from an A-angle which is a predetermined angle with respect to the live-action character image G81, and FIG. 97(b) is different from the A-angle. This corresponds to the moving image in which the person in the photographed character image G81 is captured from the angle. In addition to the A-angle moving image and the B-angle moving image, there is a moving image in which the person of the live-action character image G81 is captured from a C-angle different from the A-angle and the B-angle.

The contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 203 for executing the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 98.

In the memory module 203 as the data for executing the angle display effect, the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and the A moving image data for displaying the moving image of the A angle are stored in the memory module 203. The third moving image data group 263 of angle is stored in advance. Further, in the memory module 203, as moving image data for displaying a moving image of B angle, a first moving image data group 264 of B angle, a second moving image data group 265 of B angle, and a third moving image data group 266 of B angle. Is stored in advance. Further, in the memory module 203, as moving image data for displaying a moving image of C angle, a first moving image data group 267 of C angle, a second moving image data group 268 of C angle and a third moving image data group 269 of C angle. Is stored in advance.

FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each moving image data group 261-269, FIG. 99(a) shows the first moving image data group 261 of A angle, and FIG. 99(b) is the second moving image of A angle. 99C shows a data group 262, FIG. 99C shows a third moving picture data group 263 of A angle, FIG. 99D shows a first moving picture data group 264 of B angle, and FIG. 99E shows a B angle. 99(f) shows a B-angle third moving image data group 266, FIG. 99(g) shows a C-angle first moving image data group 267, and FIG. 99(h). ) Indicates the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and FIG. 99(i) indicates the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle.

As shown in FIGS. 99(a) to 99(i), each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c. As described above, the moving image data 271a to 273c are image data that are compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with one frame of still image data as a reference, and are encoded by the MPEG2 system, for example. .. When the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded, they are expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

The moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a data amount so that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Is set. As for the minimum unit number of still image data, specifically, each moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, 48 times of image updating (48 frame updating) is possible. Has become. Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20) of such moving image data 271a to 273c.

The first moving image data group 261, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle all correspond to the A angle in which the photographed character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of moving images viewed at different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 271a to 271c in each moving image data group 261 to 263 of the A angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of the A angle, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 271a to 271c in which the order to be decoded is the predetermined order and the following order with respect to the predetermined order. The moving image data 271a to 271c in sequence has the continuity in the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the above-described predetermined motion pattern with respect to the first sequence of still image data. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the moving image data 271a included in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is sequentially decoded and displayed while displaying the moving image data 271a. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. In the case of the second moving image data group 262 of A angle, the moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 of A angle is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order to display an image. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. In the case of the third moving image data group 263 of A angle, the moving image data 271c included in the third moving image data group 263 of A angle is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order to display an image. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle.

The B-angle first moving image data group 264, the B-angle second moving image data group 265, and the B-angle third moving image data group 266 all correspond to the B-angle when the photographed character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of moving images viewed at different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in each moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle. In this case, in each of the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266, the last still image data in the moving image data 272a to 272c in which the order to be decoded is a predetermined order and the next to the predetermined order are as follows. The moving image data 272a to 272c in the order has the continuity of the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the above-described predetermined motion pattern with respect to the first order still image data. Therefore, in the case of the B-angle first moving image data group 264, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272a included in the B-angle first moving image data group 264 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the B-angle second moving image data group 265, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272b included in the B-angle second moving image data group 265 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the B-angle third moving image data group 266, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272c included in the B-angle third moving image data group 266 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle.

The first moving image data group 267 of the C angle, the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle all correspond to the C angle indicating the movement of the photographed character image G81 according to a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of moving images viewed at different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273a to 273c in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of the C angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 267 to 269 of the C angle, the still image data of the last order in the moving image data 273a to 273c in which the order to be decoded is the predetermined order, and the following order with respect to the predetermined order. The moving image data 273a to 273c in the order has the continuity in the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the above-described predetermined motion pattern with respect to the still image data in the first order. Therefore, in the case of the C-angle first moving image data group 267, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273a included in the C-angle first moving image data group 267 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle second moving image data group 268, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273b included in the C-angle second moving image data group 268 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle third moving image data group 269, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273c included in the C-angle third moving image data group 269 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle.

Since the moving image data 271a to 273c derive the still image data by performing the decoding process, it is not possible to start displaying the image at a timing in the middle of the moving image data 271a to 273c, and the moving image data is temporarily changed. When the image display is started from the timing of the middle of the data 271a to 273c, a processing waiting time occurs until the still image data of the middle timing is derived. In this case, since each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order. It is possible to use the switching timing of as the angle changing timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among the A angle, B angle, and C angle during the execution of the angle display effect.

Here, in the angle display effect, the trigger for changing the angle is generated by the operation of the effect operation device 48. In this case, if the angle is not changed early with respect to the operation timing of the effect operation device 48, it is difficult to give the player the impression that the angle has been changed by the operation of the effect operation device 48. I will end up. On the other hand, as described above, each of the angles A to C has a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image, specifically, three moving image data groups 261 to 269. Further, the number of update times (the number of frames) of the images after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data of the first order in the arbitrary moving image data 271a to 273c is the same between the moving image data groups 261 to 269 within the same angle. It's different.

Specifically, in each of the angles A to C, in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the first order starts the angle display effect. The moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a of the subsequent order corresponds to the timing, and the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a of the previous order is still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c. It corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number. In this case, the A-angle first moving image data group 261, the B-angle first moving image data group 264, and the C-angle first moving image data group 267 have the same number of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a. , The number of times of updating the images after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a corresponding to each other is the same.

In each of the angles A to C, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 have the first moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b of the first order still image data as the first moving images of the respective angles A to C. Corresponding to the timing of moving image display for the first reference period K1 with respect to the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a of the corresponding order in the data groups 261, 264, 267. There is. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 indicate that the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the first order is the start timing of the angle display effect. On the other hand, the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the subsequent order correspond to the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the previous order, corresponding to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses for the first reference period K1. Thus, it corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of the still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, each moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is a moving image included in the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. The data 271a, 272a, 273a, which are moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order, and the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. Is included in the still image data created by the two continuous moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a included in.

In each of the angles A to C, the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 are the second moving images of the respective angles A to C in which the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in each order. Corresponding to the timing when the display of the moving image is advanced for the second reference period K1 with respect to the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b of the corresponding order in the data groups 262, 265, 268. There is. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 indicate that the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in the first order is the start timing of the angle display effect. On the other hand, the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in the subsequent order correspond to the timing in which the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2 corresponding to twice the first reference period K1. This corresponds to the timing at which the moving image display progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c for the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c. In this case, each moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is a moving image included in the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. The data 271a, 272a, 273a and the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order partially overlaps the contents of the still image data created by the decoding process, and the second moving image data at the same angle. The moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the groups 262, 265, 268 and the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the corresponding order and the content of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap. doing. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. Two consecutive moving images included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 included in the still image data created by the two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in It is included in the still image data created by the image data 271b, 272b, 273b.

The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of image updates by the single moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16.

The number of reproducible still image data in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of reproducible still image data by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of image updates by the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 32.

As described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at the respective angles A to C are provided. Further, in each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are smaller than the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267 by a number smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c. And the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is still image that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268. The first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum unit number of data is shifted by one minute. As a result, it is possible to cause a large number of switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. It is possible to change the angle at an early stage.

Next, how the angle display effect progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 100(a) shows the operation timing of the operation device for production 48, FIG. 100(b) shows the waiting period until the angle is switched with respect to the operation of the operation device for production 48, and FIG. FIG. 100(d) shows the period in which the A-angle moving image is displayed, and FIG. 100(e) shows one of the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263. Of the moving image data 271a to 271c are read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, FIG. 100(f) shows a period in which a B-angle moving image is displayed, and FIG. Indicates a period during which one piece of moving image data 272a to 272c included in the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 is read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. In the following description, the case where the A angle is changed to the B angle will be described, but the same applies to other patterns for changing the angle.

As shown in FIG. 100(c), in the situation where a moving image is displayed using the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle moving image data groups 261 to 263 as shown in FIG. 100(d), The timing at which the B angle can be switched to the second moving image data group 265 is generated at the timing of t1, and the timing at which the B angle can be switched to the third moving image data group 266 is generated at the timing of t2. However, since the production operating device 48 is not operated by the timings t1 and t2, the angle switching does not occur.

In addition, the switching of the angles triggered by the operation of the operation device 48 for effecting is performed by looping the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle in a predetermined order. Specifically, the A angle is selected at the start timing of the angle display effect, and then the operation of the effect operation device 48 triggers the A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→B angle→C angle→A. The angles are switched in the order of angle →.

After that, at the timing of t3, the moving image data 271a in the next order is read and decoded in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle which is the target of the moving image display. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the moving image data 271a in the next order is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 as shown in FIG. The decoding process is started for the image data 271a. In this case, only one moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b and the decoding process is started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process are written in the moving image data area 211b. When reading and decoding the one moving image data 271a, the moving image data area 211b is set so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a that is currently displayed is not erased. Data is set.

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the timing at which the B angle can be switched to the first moving image data group 264 is generated as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, since the effect operation device 48 is not operated by the timing of t4, the angle switching does not occur, and the moving image of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t4. The display of the moving image using the data 271a is started.

After that, at the timing of t5, the production operating device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. In this case, since the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed and it is not the time to switch to the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266, the angle as shown in FIG. Is switched to the standby state.

Then, at the timing of t6, the timing before the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the B angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 can be switched, is preceded by a period that allows the decoding of one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. This is the timing at which decoding can be started, which is the timing. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 100(g), decoding of the moving image data 272b of the switching destination in the second moving image data group 265 of B angle is started. Specifically, in the B-angle second moving image data group 265, the moving image data 272b of the current switching destination is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the moving image data 272b is decoded. Be started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process are written in the moving image data area 211b. When reading and decoding the one moving image data 272b, the moving image data area 211b is created so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a that is currently displayed is not erased. Data is set. The period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period in which the moving image is displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. For example, the decode startable timing is immediately after the switchable timing. This corresponds to the image update timing two times before the possible timing.

After that, at the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle at which the decoding is completed at the timing of t7 is started. As a result, the display of the B-angle moving image is started, as shown in FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the timing at which the C angle can be switched to the third moving image data group 269 occurs at the timing of t8. However, since the effect operation device 48 is not operated by the timing of t8, the angle switching does not occur, and the decoding of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle is completed at the timing of t7. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b is continued.

As described above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, but the operation timing of the effect operation device 48 causes the decoding processing of the switching destination moving image data 271a to 273c. Even if it starts, if the decoding process is not completed by the timing when the next angle can be switched, the angle is not switched at the timing when the next angle can be switched, and the timing when the next angle can be switched. The angle is switched at. The operation will be described.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), in the situation where a moving image is being displayed using the first moving image data group 261 of the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of the A angle, FIG. 100(a) is displayed at the timing of t9. As shown, the operation device for production 48 is operated. In this case, since the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed and it is not the time to switch to the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266, the angle as shown in FIG. Is switched to the standby state.

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the timing at which the B angle can be switched to the moving image data groups 264 to 266 is reached. However, the period between the timing of t9 when the performance operation device 48 is operated and the timing of t10 at which the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 can be switched is one moving image data 271a to. It is less than the period required to complete the decoding process for 273c. Therefore, at the timing of t10, switching to the B angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 does not occur. Note that at the timing of t10, the reading and decoding processes of the B-angle moving image data 272a to 272c have not been started yet.

After that, at the timing of t11, the timing before the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 can be switched, is preceded by a period that enables decoding of one moving image data 271a to 273c. This is the timing at which decoding can be started, which is the timing. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 100(g), decoding of the moving image data 272c of the switching destination in the B-angle third moving image data group 266 is started. Specifically, in the B-angle third moving image data group 266, the moving image data 272c of the current switching destination is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the moving image data 272c is decoded. Be started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process are written in the moving image data area 211b. Further, when reading and decoding the one moving image data 272c, the moving image data area 211b is created so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a that is currently displayed is not erased. The data is set in.

After that, at the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle at which the decoding is completed at the timing of t12 is started. As a result, the display of the B-angle moving image is started, as shown in FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the timing at which the C angle can be switched to the first moving image data group 267 occurs at the timing of t13. However, since the effect operation device 48 is not operated by the timing of t13, the angle switching does not occur, and the decoding of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle is completed at the timing of t12. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c is continued.

When the effect operation device 48 is operated immediately before the angle switchable timing as described above, the angle is switched at the next switchable timing, whereby the moving image of the angle of the switch destination is set. The angles are switched at the timing when the decoding of the data 271a to 273c is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the decoding waiting time of the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when switching the angles.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the angle display effect will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect executed by the display CPU 201. The calculation processing for the angle display effect is executed by the calculation processing for the effect in step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the open/close execution mode in which the angle display effect is to be executed.

If it is the opening period immediately before starting the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), the opening process is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period set before the display of the moving image by any of the A angle to the C angle is started, and the display of the moving image by any of the A angle to the C angle is started in the opening period. The fact that the angle can be changed is notified by the fact that the operating device for production 48 is operated. Further, during the opening period, the angle to be displayed can be selected at the start timing of the moving image display based on the operation of the effect operation device 48.

The opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not it is the read period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). In the opening period, an angle selection period that allows angle selection is set first, and then a reading period of moving image data 271a to 273c is set. If it is the angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether or not an operation generation command is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S4202). The effect operation device 48 is electrically connected to the sound-light side MPU 62, and when the effect operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 201.

When the operation generation command is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), the update processing of the angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is executed (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the read timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the angle counter is “0” corresponds to the A angle, the case where the value of the angle counter is “1” corresponds to the B angle, and the value of the angle counter is “2”. The case corresponds to the C angle. When the opening period is started, the value of the angle counter is “0”, the operation generation command is received, the process of step S4203 is executed, and 1 is added to the value of the angle counter. Further, when the value of the angle counter after adding 1 becomes "3", the value of the angle counter is cleared to "0".

On the other hand, when it is the read period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201: YES), the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the current value of the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is “0”, the moving image data 271a in the first order in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is “1”, the B angle is detected. The first moving image data 272a in the first moving image data group 264 is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "2", the first moving image data 273a in the C-angle first moving image data group 267 is grasped. To do. After that, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

When a negative determination is made in step S4202, the process of step S4203 is executed, or the process of step S4205 is executed, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the update timing of this time in the opening period. (Step S4206), the parameter information applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4207). Then, the opening information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

When the opening process is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407), various image data recognized in step S4206 are arranged in the world coordinate system. It is set as a target. Also, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, opening information is set in the drawing list. By performing the drawing process (FIG. 70) in the VDP 205 according to the drawing list, the image for the opening period is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list and the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4204 are stored. The address information of the existing memory module 203 and the address of the area for expanding the moving image data 271a to 273c as still image data in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads out the moving image data 271a to 273c specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the addresses of the moving image data 271a to 273c are grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the moving image data 271a to 273c are set as still images from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be expanded as data is grasped (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301 and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the still image data group of the decoding result is written in each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303).

Returning to the description of the calculation processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101 ), if it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), it is a condition that the operation generation command is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S4103: YES). ), "1" is set to the operation acceptance flag provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4104). The operation acceptance flag is a flag for the display CPU 201 to specify that the angle should be switched. Only one operation acceptance flag is provided, and even if the effect operation device 48 is operated a plurality of times before the angle switching occurs, the operation acceptance is performed for the second and subsequent effect operation device 48 operations. Only the state in which the flag is set to "1" is maintained. Then, as will be described in detail later, when "1" is set in the operation reception flag, no matter how many times the effect operation device 48 is operated before the angle switching occurs, the order is changed from the current angle to the next order. The switching for the angle of occurs. As a result, when the angles are switched, the angles are switched in a predetermined order as the content of the angle display effect displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect, it is determined in step S4105 whether or not it is the timing when decoding of the moving image data 271a to 273c can be started. The decode startable timing is the angle switchable timing that occurs thereafter (timing t1, timing t2, timing t4, timing t7, timing t8, timing t10, timing t12, timing t13 in FIG. 100). The timing is set as an image update timing before a predetermined period, in other words, a predetermined number of times before. More specifically, the period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period in which the moving image is displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. Corresponds to the image update timing two times before the immediately following switchable timing. Whether or not it is the decoding timing of the moving image data is grasped based on the execution target table for the angle display effect read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when the angle display effect is started.

When it is the timing when decoding of the moving image data 271a to 273c can be started (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether the operation acceptance flag of the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (step S4106). When "1" is not set in the operation reception flag (step S4106: NO), the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 is decremented by 1 (step S4107). The timing counter displays the same moving picture data group 261 when the moving pictures are continuously displayed by the moving picture data 271a to 273c for the same moving picture data group 261 to 269 without switching the angle. It is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify the timing to execute the decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in the order of. "3" is set to the timing counter when the decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is newly executed, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are used in the situation where the same moving image data 271a to 273c are used. The value of the timing counter is decremented by "1" every time the decoding timing of is reached. The value of the timing counter is "3" at the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display effect.

When the value of the timing counter after subtracting “1” is “0” (step S4108: YES), the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in the same moving image data group 261 to 269 is decoded. Means there is. In this case, the process for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

Specifically, first, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As described above, the angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the read timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image correspondence table 275 is prestored in the memory module 203 in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. The moving image correspondence table 275 has a predetermined relationship between the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c may occur and the type of moving image data 271a to 273c to be switched at the switching timing. In addition, at each angle, new moving image data 271a to 273c are created by the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 and the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. Since the timing at which switching can occur is different and the types of moving image data 271a to 273c to be switched are also different, the above data is set for each moving image data group 261 to 269 to be used in the moving image correspondence table 275. There is.

FIG. 104A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the A angle. The contents of the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the B angle and the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the C angle are the same as in FIG. 104(a).

As shown in FIG. 104( a ), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271 a to 271 c may occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c, and specifically, each time the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. The pointer information of the reference target is incremented by 1. Further, when the display of the image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c is started in the angle display effect, the pointer information of the reference target is “0”. Then, the update of the pointer information of the reference target is continued without being cleared to "0" on the way until the display of the image using the moving image data 271a to 271c is finished in the angle display effect. Therefore, when the pointer information is “16”, it means that the image update using the moving image data 271a to 271c has been performed 16 times, and when the pointer information is “32”, the moving image data has been updated by that time. This means that the image update using 271a to 271c has been performed 32 times.

One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set corresponding to each pointer information corresponding to switching. As described above, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a in the subsequent order is the moving image data 271a in the previous order. On the other hand, it corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image is advanced by the number of the still image data that can be displayed by using one moving image data 271a. Therefore, regarding the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and the number of still image data that can be displayed using one moving image data 271a is set. On the other hand, pointer information corresponding to each value obtained by multiplying by an integer is set as pointer information corresponding to switching. Then, with respect to each of the pointer information corresponding to each of the switching, information on the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically, in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204, an area in which each moving image data 271a is expanded is displayed. Address information is set.

As described above, the moving image data 271b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. doing. Therefore, regarding the second moving image data group 262, as the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271b in the first order, the pointer information corresponding to the start timing of the angle display effect is displayed at the timing when the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1. Pointer information is set. Further, with respect to the moving image data 271b after the first order in the second moving image data group 262, the pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is used as the pointer information corresponding to the switching. On the other hand, the pointer information at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 is set.

As described above, the moving image data 271c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. doing. Therefore, regarding the third moving image data group 263, as the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271c in the first order, the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. Further, with respect to the moving image data 271c after the first order in the third moving image data group 263, the pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 as the pointer information corresponding to the switching. On the other hand, the pointer information at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the second reference period K2 is set.

Returning to the explanation of the calculation processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101 ), after reading the moving image correspondence table 275, the moving image data 271 a to 273 c to be read this time and for which the decoding processing is to be executed are grasped (step S 4110 ). At the time of grasping, the target moving image counter provided in the work RAM 202 is referred to. The target moving image counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which moving image data group 261 to 269 is to be read at the read timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the target moving image counter is “0” corresponds to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is “1” is the second moving image data group 262, 265. , 268, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is “2” corresponds to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. In step S4110, the type of moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read is specified in the moving image correspondence table 275 read in step S4109 based on the value of the target moving image counter. Then, of the pointer information corresponding to the switching set for the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read, the value is larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect, and is set to the current pointer information. On the other hand, the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c set corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the closest value is grasped. As a result, the display CPU 201 grasps the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c that should be read this time and should be decoded.

After that, "3" is set in the timing counter of the work RAM 202 (step S4111), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, the decode specification information is set in the drawing list this time, and the information and the moving image of the memory module 203 in which the moving image data 271a to 273c stored in step S4110 are stored. In the data area 211b, an address of an area for expanding the moving image data 271a to 273c as still image data is set. The VDP 205 that has received the drawing list executes the decoding process (FIG. 103) as described above, thereby reading the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b. Then, the decoding process is executed, and each still image data after the decoding process is written in a designated area in the moving image data area 211b.

On the other hand, in the calculation processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), when the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 is set to “1” at the decoding startable timing (step S4105 and step S4106: YES), the operation is performed. The reception flag is cleared to "0" (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). The switching reference table 276 is a type of the angle and moving image data group 261 to 269 of the switching destination in relation to the current type of the angle and moving image data group 261 to 269 when the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. It is a table for specifying.

FIG. 104B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. 104(b), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c may occur. The content of the pointer information is the same as the content described for the moving image correspondence table 275 of FIG. The pointer information corresponding to the switching is set in association with the respective switchable timings of the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 and the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. Has been done. Specifically, the pointer information corresponding to the first switching is set to the pointer information at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the subsequent switching is supported. The pointer information of is set to the pointer information at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the pointer information corresponding to the immediately preceding switching.

For the pointer information corresponding to each switching, information on the corresponding relationship between the current angle and the combination of the switching destination angle and the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set. Specifically, as described above, when the angle is changed in response to the operation of the staging operation device 48, A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→... The angle switching occurs in this order. Further, the switchable timing to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, the switchable timing to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 and the switchable timing to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 are: This is as described in the moving image correspondence table 275 of FIG. Therefore, the correspondence is as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Returning to the explanation of the calculation processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101 ), after reading the switching reference table 276, the setting processing of the angle counter and the target moving image counter is executed based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In the setting process, of the pointer information corresponding to the switching set in the switching reference table 276, the value corresponding to the value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect and closest to the current pointer information is supported. Of the pointer information corresponding to the switching, and the information set in association with the current angle in the pointer information corresponding to the switching is specified. For example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “10” and the current angle is the A angle, the B angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information based on the switching reference table 276, and the switching is performed. The information of the second moving image data group 265 is specified as the information of the previous moving image data groups 261 to 269. Further, for example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “68” and the current angle is the C angle, the A angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information based on the switching reference table 276, The information of the third moving image data group 263 is specified as the information of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 of the switching destination. The specified angle information of the switching destination is set in the angle counter, and the information of the specified moving image data groups 261 to 269 of the switching destination is set in the target moving image counter.

After executing the processes of steps S4113 to S4115, the processes of steps S4109 to S4112 already described are executed. In this case, in step S4109, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the angle counter newly set in step S4115 is read, and in step S4110, the value of the target moving image counter newly set in step S4115 is read. The moving image data 271a to 273c to be recognized are grasped.

In the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect, it is determined whether it is time to change the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processes of steps S4109 to S4112 are executed, “1” is set in the change trigger flag provided in the work RAM 202. In step S4116, when the change trigger flag is set to "1" and the timing for switching the moving image data 271a to 273c is reached, the type of moving image data 271a to 273c is changed. Therefore, a positive determination is made. The switchable timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is as described above, and the first switchable timing corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Therefore, the subsequent switchable timing corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image is advanced by the first reference period K1 with respect to the immediately previous switchable timing.

When it is the change timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to “0” (step S4117). If a positive determination is made in step S4116, the change opportunity flag is cleared to "0". The frame counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which still image data among the still image data of the moving image data 271a to 273c expanded in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is to be used. Is. When the value of the frame counter is "0", the still image data in the first order in the expanded single moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped as the usage target. Further, when the still image data is grasped as a target to be used in step S4118 described later, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4118, the still image in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the increment of 1 is performed. Data is grasped for use.

When a negative determination is made in step S4116 or when the processing of step S4117 is executed, the still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped as the image data to be used at this update timing (step S4118). .. In this case, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1. Further, while grasping other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing of this time (step S4119), the parameter information applied to the image data grasped in step S4118 and step S4119 is calculated. It is derived (step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

When the calculation processing for the angle display effect is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407), the various image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119 are included. Is set as the placement target in the world coordinate system. Also, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. Also, angle rendering information is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, as the setting process for the angle display effect, the VDP 205 first grasps the still image data grasped in step S4118 (step S4401), and then step S4119. The other image data grasped in step S4402 is grasped (step S4402). Further, the parameter information grasped in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). Then, the image data acquired in steps S4401 and S4402 is set in the world coordinate system while the parameter information acquired in step S4403 is applied (step S4404). As a result, the drawing data for displaying the image for the angle display effect is finally created, and the image for the angle display effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Note that the angle display effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process of step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the angle effect information is set is received.

As described above, since each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order are formed. The switching timing can be used as the angle changing timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among the A angle, B angle, and C angle during the execution of the angle display effect.

Further, the moving image data 271a to 273c are set in data amount so that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. This makes it possible to set a large number of timings at which the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used can be switched. Moreover, according to the said structure, it becomes possible to reduce the data amount of the image data read at once.

A plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at the respective angles A to C are provided. Further, in each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are smaller than the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267 by a number smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c. And the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is still image that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268. The first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum unit number of data is shifted by one minute. As a result, it is possible to cause a large number of switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. It is possible to change the angle at an early stage.

The moving image data 271a to 273c are not collectively read for each selected angle, but one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and is a target for use. When the timing for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c becomes, one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read and decoded. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to read the moving image data 271a to 273c in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204.

In a situation in which one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and is to be used, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next is read and decoded. This makes it possible to prevent a waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c when the new moving image data 271a to 273c are used.

In the configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, even if the operation timing of the effect operation device 48 is before the switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c, it is after the decoding start timing. In such a case, the angle change with respect to the operation of the effect operation device 48 does not occur immediately after the switchable timing but at the next switchable timing with respect to the immediately subsequent switchable timing. Thereby, it becomes possible to smoothly perform the angle switching with respect to the operation of the effect operation device 48.

<Another form related to angle display production>
The number of images that can be displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is not limited to the same configuration, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least a part of the moving image data is another moving image. It may be configured differently from the data. In this case, it is necessary to set the timing for switching to the new moving image data 271a to 273c and the timing to start decoding in accordance with the type of each moving image data 271a to 273c.

In the configuration in which the moving image display using the moving image data is started when the production operation device 48 is operated during the operation valid period, the moving image display starts from the timing corresponding to the elapsed time from the start timing of the operation valid period. Depending on the configuration to be started, a group of moving image data that can display a series of specific moving images and another group of moving image data that can display a moving image that starts from the timing in the middle of the specific moving image. A configuration in which and are separately provided may be applied.

The number of moving image data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three and may be two or four or more. The types of angles are not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types.

<Structure for performing special video use production>
Next, a configuration for performing a special moving image use effect will be described.

The special moving image use effect is an effect of using the special moving image data 282 when displaying an image on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the special moving image data 282, FIG. 106(a) shows the normal moving image data 281 such as the moving image data 271a to 273c already explained, and FIG. 106(b). Indicates special moving image data 282.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), in the normal moving image data 281, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data is one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I picture data is data that can be used to create still image data for one frame by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data preceding by one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. .. When decoding B picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames after decoding. This is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

In the compressed data of the normal moving image data 281, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the m-th frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame,..., The n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

By performing decoding processing on the normal moving image data 281, still image data 283a to 283d (hereinafter, referred to as normal decoded image data 283a to 283d) for a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 281 are stored in the VRAM 204. It is created in the moving image data area 211b. In this case, the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d have mutually different contents.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the special moving image data 282 has file data set at the first address, followed by I frame data for one frame corresponding to the reference data. No compressed data other than the I picture data is set. By performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, still image data 284 corresponding to a plurality of update timings (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 284) from the special moving image data 282 is a moving image data area of the VRAM 204. It will be created in 211b. However, in these special decoded image data 284, the contents of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 284 are all the same image data.

The data amount of the special moving image data 282 is set so that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Regarding the minimum unit number of still image data, specifically, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, the image can be updated 48 times (update of 48 frames). ing. Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, the same special decoded image data 284 as the image content is created for the minimum number of units. Note that the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 have the data amount set so that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced as described above. However, the amount of the normal moving image data 281 other than the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that it is possible to create still image data in a number larger than the minimum unit number that can be set as moving image data. There is.

The special moving image data 282 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 like the normal moving image data 281, but a plurality of types of special moving image data 282 are stored in the memory module 203. The content of the image by the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding processing differs for each type of the special moving image data 282.

The special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, the memory module 203 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 284 as texture data. Although the type of image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 and the predetermined object data is arbitrary, for example, a character image of an animal such as a person, a cat, a fish, and a dog may be displayed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an individual image that is a figure of the object is displayed.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it is possible to store one piece of texture data in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 as the still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for the expansion of the VRAM 204. It is written in the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read in the texture area 211a is changed every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 increases.

On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, it is possible to read some of the texture data into the VRAM 204 as necessary while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. Becomes Since the special moving image data 282 is not stored as the texture data in the memory module 203, the texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 by using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using the texture data, the moving image data area 211b does not read the texture data itself but the special moving image data 282. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read into the moving image data area 211b.

Next, how the special moving image use effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 107. 107(a) shows the timing of starting the supply of operating power, FIG. 107(b) shows the reading period of the texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, and FIG. 107(c) shows the texture area 211a. 107 (d) shows the start timing of the special moving image use effect, and FIG. 107 (e) is the execution period of the special moving image use effect, in which the special moving image data 282 is used. FIG. 107(f) shows a read period of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107(g) shows a use period of the special moving image data 282. ..

At the timing of t1, the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 107(a), so that the texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a is shown in FIG. 107(b). Is started, and the reading of the texture data is completed at the timing of t2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107C, while the supply of the operating power to the VRAM 204 is continued, all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 is stored and held in the texture area 211a. .. Since backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, it is impossible to store and hold texture data in the texture area 211a when the supply of operating power to the display control device 200 is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 107(d), it becomes the start timing of the special moving image use effect. However, the use of the special moving image data 282 is not started at the timing of t3. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the object data read out from the memory module 203 to an area other than the texture area 211a and the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 as necessary, and the texture at the start of supply of operating power. Drawing data is created using the texture data read in the use area 211a, and an image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 using the drawing data.

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 107(f), the read timing of the special moving image data 282 comes, so that the reading of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b is started. At the same time, the decoding process is executed on the special moving image data 282 read in the moving image data area 211b. Then, at the timing of t5, the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and the plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 are for moving image data. It is written in the area 211b.

At the timing of t5 when the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, the display of the image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107(g). In this case, the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data to be pasted on the predetermined object data, and the predetermined object data and the special decoded image data 284 are projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Drawing data is created. Then, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data, so that the image is displayed using the special decoded image data 284. After that, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends at the timing of t6.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the special moving image use effect will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for special moving image use effect executed by the display CPU 201. The calculation process for the special moving image use effect is executed by the effect calculation process of step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game time in which the special moving image use effect is to be executed.

When it is not the period of use of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: NO), the special moving image data 282 is read by referring to the execution target table read to the work RAM 202 to control the execution of the special moving image use effect. It is determined whether it is the read timing (step S4502). When it is the read timing of the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read this time and subjected to the decoding process is grasped (step S4502). There are a plurality of types of special moving image use effects, and the type of the special moving image data 282 to be used differs for each type of special moving image use effects. Also, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

Then, while grasping various image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing of this time (step S4505), the parameter information applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). The various image data acquired in step S4505 includes the object data stored in the memory module 203 and the texture data read in the texture area 211a.

When the special moving image use effect calculation process is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407), various image data recognized in step S4505 are stored in the world. It is set as the placement target in the coordinate system. Also, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. Also, special moving image use effect information is set in the drawing list.

When the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list and the special moving image data 282 grasped in step S4503 is stored. The address information of the memory module 203 and the address of the area for expanding the special moving image data 282 as the special decoded image data 284 in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the special moving image data 282 is converted into special decoded image data from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area developed as 284 is grasped (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, the plurality of special decoded image data 284 obtained as a result of the decoding are written in each area of the address of the moving picture data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 is written in the moving image data area 211b.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic process for the special moving image use effect (FIG. 108 ), when it is the use period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: YES), the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202. Is grasped as the image data to be used at this update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is used by the display CPU 201 to specify which of the special decoded image data 284 of the special decoded image data 284 of the special moving image data 282 developed in the moving image data area 211b is to be used. It is a counter. The frame counter is also used when the normal moving image data 281 is used for an angle display effect. Further, when the use period of the special moving image data 282 is started, the value of the frame counter is “0”, and when the value of the frame counter is “0”, the first order in the special moving image data 282 is set. The special decoded image data 284 of is grasped as a use target. Further, when the special decoded image data 284 is grasped as the object to be used in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4508, special decoding is performed in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after incrementing by 1. The image data 284 is grasped as a usage target.

Here, as described above, the plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the special decoded image data 284 is the same. The contents of the images displayed by using the same are the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data, one special decoded image data 284 is not always used, but the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used. This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as that for displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

Then, other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing of this time is grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which the special decoded image data 284 is applied. After that, the parameter information applied to the image data grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and the use instruction information of the special moving image data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

When the special moving image use effect calculation process is executed as described above, the various images acquired in steps S4508 and S4509 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). The data is set as the placement target in the world coordinate system. Also, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. Further, use instruction information of special moving image data is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set, the VDP 205 executes the setting process for the special moving image use effect. In the setting process for the special moving image use effect, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, when the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoding recognized in step S4508 is performed. The image data 284 is grasped (step S4602). Further, the other image data grasped in step S4509 is grasped (step S4603), and the parameter information grasped in step S4510 is grasped (step S4604). Then, the image data acquired in steps S4602 and S4603 is set in the world coordinate system in a state where the parameter information acquired in step S4604 is applied (step S4605). As a result, drawing data for displaying an image for special moving image use effect using the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for special moving image use effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Will be done. The setting process for the special moving image use effect is for the effect process of step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set is received. Is executed in the setting process of.

Since the special moving image data 282 is set as described above, it is possible to store one piece of texture data in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 as the still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for the expansion of the VRAM 204. It is written in the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read in the texture area 211a is changed every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 increases.

On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, it is possible to read some of the texture data into the VRAM 204 as necessary while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. Becomes Since the special moving image data 282 is not stored as the texture data in the memory module 203, the texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 by using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using the texture data, the moving image data area 211b does not read the texture data itself but the special moving image data 282. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read into the moving image data area 211b.

The number of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is one. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary image data from being created.

The plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the images displayed using the special decoded image data 284 are the same. The contents are the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as the texture data, one special decoded image data 284 is not always used, but the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used. As a result, it becomes possible to use the same processing configuration as the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

The special moving image data 282 has only I picture data, and does not have difference data such as B picture data and P picture data. As a result, the data structure of the special moving image data 282 can be simplified.

The special moving image data 282 is set as the minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data. As a result, the data volume of the special moving image data 282 can be kept small.

<Another form for special video use production>
Not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the object data into the VRAM 204 at an appropriate timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 at each drawing data creation timing.

-Although a plurality of types of image data are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, only one or a part of them may be used. Even in this case, the texture data can be treated as moving image data.

It is also possible that only one piece of image data is created by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282. In this case, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282.

As for the special moving image data 282, only the same I picture data is set in plural, and when the decoding process is executed on the special moving image data 282, the image data for the number of I picture data may be created. ..

A plurality of pieces of image data of the same type are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, but only one piece of the image data may be used. In this case, only one image data among the plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process may be stored and held in the moving image data area 211b, and the rest may be erased.

A separate storage area is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, all or part of the image data created in the moving image data area 211b becomes a separate storage area. It may be configured to be transferred. In this case, the image data can be stored and held in the separate storage area even after use, and the special moving image data 282 can be stored by reading the image data from the separate storage area in the next use. There is no need to perform the decoding process again for.

The special moving image data 282 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference becomes “0”. Even in this case, it is possible to create a plurality of special decoded image data 284 of the same type.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following another mode may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) The processing configuration of the sound/light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment described above are configured to display a 3D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the second embodiment. May be applied to. Further, the processing configuration of the sound/light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment are changed to a configuration for displaying a 2D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment. You may apply.

(2) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data set in the world coordinate system. However, instead of this, all cameras set in the world coordinate system are set. A single camera may be commonly set for image data.

(3) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in the unit of the background image, the effect image, and the design image, but is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image. The projection image may be projected as a unit, the effect image and the symbol image may be collectively projected, or all of them may be collectively projected.

(4) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2609) is performed, the color information may be set by pasting the texture only on the projected surface. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, color information such as texture mapping may be set after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, the coordinate information of each pixel forming the projection plane may be stored, and the color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

(5) Display control is performed based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50. The device 90 may control the audio emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 50, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(6) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine provided with other accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable is provided with a storage part and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the rotation of the reel is started by doing so.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets, etc.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display section using image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means stores special moving image data (special moving image data 282) in which the display control means creates one type of image data to be used by the display control means. A gaming machine characterized by being stored in.

According to the characteristic A1, since the decoding process is executed and the special moving image data in which the image data to be used is one kind is provided by the display control means, one kind of the image data after the decoding is converted into a special moving image. It can be handled as image data. As a result, it is possible to use the one type of image data without increasing the capacity of the image data of the same type as the one type of image data after the decoding.

Features A2. The game machine according to Feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data in which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process.

According to the characteristic A2, when the special moving image data is decoded, a plurality of types of image data are not created, but one type of image data is created, so that unnecessary image data is created. It is possible to obtain the above-mentioned effects while preventing the above-mentioned effects.

Features A3. The special moving image data is data in which a plurality of special image data (still image data 284) having the same content is created by the execution of the decoding process, and the game according to the feature A1 or A2. Machine.

According to the characteristic A3, when the decoding process is executed on the special moving image data, a plurality of special image data having the same content is created, and therefore, the same handling as the image data created from other moving image data is performed. , Special image data having the same content can be used at the update timing of a plurality of images.

Features A4. When the image update timing is a predetermined update timing, the display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data, and next to the predetermined update timing, The special-purpose image data in the next order with respect to the predetermined order is used when the update timing is No. A7.

According to the characteristic A4, a plurality of special image data having the same content are created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data, and the special image data are to be used in a predetermined order. As a result, the special image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data and the image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data other than the special moving image data It can be handled in the same way.

Features A5. The moving image data other than the special moving image data includes reference data (I picture data) that is a reference when the image data is created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the reference data. And difference data (B picture data, P picture data) capable of creating image data different from the image data created by the reference data,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data includes the reference data and does not include the difference data.

According to the characteristic A5, since the special moving image data has the reference data and does not have the difference data, the data structure of the special moving image data in which only one type of image data is created when the decoding process is executed Can be simplified. Further, the data volume of the special moving image data can be suppressed to be small.

Features A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a minimum amount of data that can be set as moving image data.

According to the feature A6, it is possible to keep the data volume of the special moving image data small.

Features A7. The display control unit executes a predetermined process on predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage unit to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (step in VDP 205). Function for executing the processing of S2609),
When the image corresponding to the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is displayed, the predetermined process is executed by the predetermined process executing unit on the special image data. And
When the display control means uses the image data, the image data is read from the display storage means to the read storage means (VRAM 204).
The read storage means includes a first read area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second read area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is characterized in that

According to the characteristic A7, when the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not directly used from the display storage means but is used after being once read out to the reading storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the reading storage device in advance, when the display control device uses the image data, the image data can be used immediately. Further, since the reading storage means is provided with the first reading area for reading the predetermined image data and the second reading area for reading the special moving image data, the reading storage means can be used for reading according to each application. Since the area is set, it becomes possible to specify the area according to the type of the image data when using the image data in the display control means.

In this case, with the configuration of the characteristic A1 described above, the special image data is displayed as special moving image data instead of as the predetermined image data although only one kind of special image data is used in the display control means. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, the special image data is read not in the first read area but in the second read area, so there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature A8. A plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the display storage means,
The gaming machine is
A first read execution unit (a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) that reads all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data into the first read area at a predetermined read timing;
In a case where image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area, when image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area, Second read execution means (a function of executing a decoding process in the VDP 205) for overwriting the image data on the image data already stored in the second read area;
A gaming machine according to feature A7, which is provided with:

According to the characteristic A8, all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first read area, so it is not necessary to read out the predetermined image data as necessary. On the other hand, moving image data is read into the second read area as needed, and when new moving image data is read, the second read area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, the special image data is provided as the special moving image data, not as the predetermined image data, even though only one type of special image data is used in the display control means, which is provided with the configuration of the characteristic A1. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, the special image data is read not in the first read area but in the second read area, so there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Features A9. The game machine according to feature A8, wherein the first read execution means reads all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data into the first read area when supply of operating power is started.

According to the characteristic A9, it is possible to cause a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data have been read to the first reading area at an early stage.

Feature A10. The special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic A10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described when the texture data is used.

For any one of the features A1 to A10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display section;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Data that determines the display mode of the individual image at each update timing of the image when the specific variation display is performed on the individual image (the symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display unit for a predetermined period. Information storage means (memory module) that stores in advance the mode determining information (execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, execution target table T12 for the first low speed period) in which 74),
The display control means,
Target determining means (display CPU 72) that determines at least one of the type of the individual image to which the aspect determining information is applied in the plurality of types of individual images and the order in which the aspect determining information is applied to the plurality of types of individual images. Function for executing the processing of steps S908 and S1011)
Application executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1014 in the display CPU 72) for performing the specific variation display by applying the aspect determining information according to the content determined by the target determining means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the mode determining information is commonly applied to a plurality of types of individual images. As a result, the aspect determining information can be commonly used for various situations in which the specific variation display is executed, and the number of aspect determining information can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the mode determining information in the information storage means.

Feature B2. When the specific variable display is newly started, the individual image of the type displayed at the start is display-controlled so as to start the variable display in a predetermined variation start mode, and is displayed at the start. The type of the individual image that is made is a configuration that can change,
As the mode determination information, at least information for causing the individual image to perform a variable display according to the predetermined variation start mode is set,
The target determining means applies the aspect determining information to a plurality of types of the individual images in accordance with the types of the individual images displayed at the start of the specific variation display. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein at least one of the orders in which the aspect determining information is applied is determined in an individual image.

According to the characteristic B2, by making the mode of variable display at the start of the specific variable display constant in a predetermined variation start mode, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the specific variable display has started. .. Further, even when the mode of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display is fixed as described above, the specific variable display is started because the type of the individual image displayed at the start may change. It is possible to diversify the mode in.

In the configuration, the mode determining information is set with the information for performing the variable display of the individual image according to the predetermined variation start mode at the start of the specific variation display, and is displayed at the start of the specific variation display. At least one of the type of individual image and the order of individual images to which the aspect determining information is applied is determined in a manner corresponding to the type of individual image. This makes it possible to commonly use the mode determining information for performing the specific variation display even in the configuration in which the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display can change.

Feature B3. The individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variation display is finished last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time. The gaming machine described in Feature B2.

According to the feature B3, since the individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variation display is finished last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time, the specific variation is displayed. When the display is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give continuity to each execution time of the specific variation display. In this case, at the start of the specific variation display, the type of the individual image for which the variable display is started differs depending on the predetermined variation start mode. However, since the feature B2 is provided, Even in a configuration in which the type of individual image displayed at the start of variable display can be changed, it is possible to commonly use the mode determining information for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B4. In the mode determining information, mode information (contents of the task) for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in time series,
The target determining means changes the type of the individual image to which each of the aspect information is applied, the type of the individual image to be the target of execution of the specific variation display as the specific variation display progresses. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, which is determined in correspondence with the above.

According to the feature B4, even if the type of the individual image that is the target of execution of the specific variation display changes with the progress of the specific variation display, the aspect information set in time series in the aspect determination information is applied. The type of individual image to be processed is determined. This makes it possible to commonly use the mode determining information even in a configuration in which the type of individual image to be subjected to the specific variation display changes with the progress of the specific variation display.

Feature B5. Any one of the features B1 to B4 characterized in that the aspect determining information is set as information corresponding to a period that is equal to or longer than a longest continuation period assumed as a situation in which the aspect determining information is used. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B5, the aspect determining information can be commonly used regardless of the duration of various situations in which the aspect determining information is used.

Feature B6. The duration of the situation in which the mode determining information is used is a predetermined timing from one switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the mode determining information is applied to the next switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the use of the aspect determining information is set to end.

In the case of the configuration in which the mode determination information is set in association with the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used, the mode determination is performed in the middle of the time-series information set in the mode determination information. It is assumed that the use timing of the usage information comes to the end timing and the next control information becomes the usage target. In this case, according to the feature B6, the end timing of the use of the mode determining information is determined in advance from one switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the mode determining information is applied to the next switching timing. It will be the timing that was decided. As a result, the situation in which the use of the next control information is started can be made constant, and the design of the control information can be facilitated.

The "predetermined timing from one switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the aspect determining information is applied to the next switching timing" is "the application target of the aspect determining information." The timing at which the type of the individual image is switched is also included.

Feature B7. The information for determining the mode is
Aspect information group (contents of task) in which aspect information for determining the aspect of the specific variation display is set in time series,
A target information group (display pattern adjustment area) in which a plurality of target information items in which the type information of the individual image to which the mode information is applied is set in association with the mode information,
Equipped with
The target determining unit sets information of the type of the individual image for each of the target information included in the target information group when starting to use the aspect determining information. The game machine described in any one of B1 to B6.

According to the feature B7, since the mode information group and the target information group are set in the mode determination information, the target of the mode information is applied at each update timing only by referring to the mode determination information. It is possible to understand the type of image. In this case, when the use of the mode determining information is started, the individual image type information is set for each of the target information included in the target information group of the mode determining information. With this, it is not necessary to perform the process of adjusting the type of the individual image to be applied during the execution of the specific variation display, and thus it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during the execution of the specific variation display.

Feature B8. The specific variation display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variation display areas,
The game according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the mode determining information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variation display in each of the plurality of variation display areas. Machine.

According to the characteristic B8, since the mode determining information is commonly used for the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas, the number of mode determining information can be suppressed.

For any one of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display section;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means causes the simultaneous display control means (in the display CPU 72) to simultaneously display the first type image (loop display character G4) and the second type image (loop display background G5) on the display section. A function for executing the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop, VDP76),
In the gaming machine, the first mode determining information (character moving table 123) in which the first mode information determining the display mode of the first type image is set in time series, and the display mode of the second type image. The second aspect determining information (background table 124) in which the second aspect information for determining is set in time series, and an information storage unit (memory module 74) that stores in advance,
When the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed on the display unit, the simultaneous display control unit determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, A game machine characterized in that the display mode of the second type image is determined according to the second mode determination information.

According to the feature C1, in the configuration in which the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time, the aspect determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is one aspect. It is not provided as the determination information, but first mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and second mode determination information for determining the display mode of the second type image. Are provided individually. As a result, when one of the first type image and the second type image is stopped and displayed, the other is variably displayed, and then the image on the side that is stopped and displayed is changed from the state that the stop and displayed is performed. Even when the display is restarted, it is possible to independently control the display of each type of image by using each of the first aspect determination information and the second aspect determination information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control the display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time.

Feature C2. The information for determining the first aspect is
A first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first reference information is set, in which the reference target by the simultaneous display control unit is sequentially updated at each update timing of the first type image;
A first mode information group (of a task) in which first mode information for determining a display mode of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is set in association with each of the first reference information. Content),
Equipped with
The information for determining the second aspect is
A second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of second reference information are sequentially set to update the reference target by the simultaneous display control unit each time the second type image is updated.
The second mode information group (of the task) in which the second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is set in association with each of the second reference information. Content),
The gaming machine described in the feature C1.

According to the characteristic C2, the dedicated first reference information group is set for the first mode determination information, and the dedicated second reference information group is set for the second mode determination information. Thereby, while not using one of the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information, the reference information that is the reference target of the other is continued to be updated, or the reference information that is the reference target of the other is continued. It becomes possible to hold the predetermined reference information.

Feature C3. The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for displaying the first type image in the first variation mode is set in time series,
The information storage means sets third mode determination information (character retention table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in time series. The game machine according to the feature C1 or C2, which is stored in advance.

According to the characteristic C3, different mode determining information is provided in correspondence with the fact that the content of the variation mode is different even when the first type image is displayed. Thus, when switching between the situation in which the first type image is displayed in the first variation mode and the situation in which the first type image is displayed in the variation mode different from the first variation mode, the mode to be used is determined. It is only necessary to switch the usage information between the first aspect determination information and the third aspect determination information, and it is possible to suitably switch between these variation aspects.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means,
First simultaneous display control means (step S1102 to step S1104 in the display CPU 72, step S1109 to step S1113 and step in the display CPU 72) for controlling the display of the display unit so that both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed. A function of executing the processing of S1202 to step S1206),
Second simultaneous display control means (steps S1105 to S1113 in the display CPU 72) for controlling display of the display unit so that one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stopped and displayed. A function of executing the processing of steps S1207 to S1208),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic C4, a situation in which both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed, and a situation in which one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stopped and displayed. By the occurrence, it is possible to diversify the display mode even in the situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, since the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information are separately provided with the configuration of the characteristic C1, the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information are provided when the display states are switched. It is only necessary to switch the usage status of the information for determining the second mode, and it is possible to suitably switch the display status.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means controls the display of the display unit so that the first type image displays in the first variation mode and the second type image displays in the second variation mode.
The second simultaneous display control means controls the display of the display unit such that the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image is stopped and displayed.
The first aspect determination information is information in which the first aspect information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the first variation aspect is set in time series,
The information storage means stores in advance third mode determination information (character retention table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the different variation mode is set in time series. The gaming machine described in Feature C4.

According to the characteristic C5, the situation in which the first type image is variably displayed in the first variation mode and the second type image is variably displayed in the second variation mode, and the first type image is different from the first variation mode Due to the situation in which the second type image is displayed in a stopped state while being variably displayed according to the variation mode, even in a situation in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed, the display modes are diversified. Can be achieved. In this case, the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information are individually provided for the first type image, and the second mode determination information is individually provided for the second type image. ing. As a result, when switching the display states, the use target is switched between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information for the first type image, and the second mode determination is performed for the second type image. It suffices to switch between a situation where the information to be used is updated and a situation where it is fixed in the usage information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably switch these display situations.

Feature C6. In the first mode determining information, information necessary for causing the first type image to display a series of first variation modes for one cycle is set in time series,
The simultaneous display control means is capable of repeatedly displaying the series of first variation modes by the first type image by repeatedly using the first mode determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

According to the characteristic C6, by repeatedly using the information for determining the first aspect, it is possible to cause the first type image to repeatedly display the series of the first variation aspects. If the information for variably displaying the first type image and the information for variably displaying the second type image are integrally set as one aspect determining information, the series of first images in the first type image are set. When one cycle of the display of the variation mode is finished and the next one cycle is started, the first type image is also displayed unless the display content is such that the display of one cycle is started in the second type image. It is necessary to set the information for displaying the one variation mode more than one round. In this case, the information for more than one round is wasted. On the other hand, since the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information are provided separately with the configuration of the characteristic C1, it is not necessary to set such useless information.

Feature C7. In the second mode determining information, information necessary for causing the second type image to display a series of second variation modes for one cycle is set in time series,
The simultaneous display control means can repeatedly display the series of second variation modes by the second type image by repeatedly using the second mode determination information,
The number of update timings of the first type image required to cause the first type image to display the first type of variation for one cycle, and the second type image to display the second type of variation according to 1 The gaming machine according to feature C6, which is different in the number of update timings of the second type image required to perform the circulation.

According to the characteristic C7, since the first mode determining information and the second mode determining information are separately provided, only the information corresponding to each one cycle of the first variation mode and the second variation mode is provided. Can be set in each aspect determining information, and it is not necessary to set useless information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means,
When the display of the first type image according to the first aspect determination information is started, the start information is set in the start information storage unit (the interlocking flag 125), and the first information is determined according to the first aspect determination information. Means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when the display of the first type image is terminated (function of executing the processing of steps S1103 and S1107 in the display CPU 72);
A means for displaying the second type image in accordance with the second mode determining information when the start information is set in the start information storage means (a positive determination is made in step S1201 in the display CPU 72). Function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic C8, when the display of the first type image according to the information for determining the first mode is started, the start information is set, and when the display is ended, the start information is erased and the start information is set. Since the second type image is displayed according to the second mode determining information when is set, if the information on the use start timing of the first mode determining information is prepared in advance. The second mode determining information can be used in conjunction with the use of the first mode determining information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of use start timing information in a configuration in which the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information are individually provided.

For any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
First setting range control means (display CPU 72) for displaying the first setting range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data (decoded image data 132) to the first setting range Function for executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in step VDP76),
Second setting range control means for displaying the second setting range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range. (A function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S1311 to S1313, VDP76),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic D1, the first setting range image and the first setting range image are changed by changing the range set in the setting storage means between the first setting range and the second setting range while using the same specific image data. It is possible to display each of the two setting range images. This makes it possible to change the content of the displayed image even when the number of types of image data is small.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap.

According to the characteristic D2, since the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap with each other, the first setting range image and the second setting range image are used while using the same specific image data. It is possible to cause a slight change in the image.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image after the first setting range image is displayed.

According to the feature D3, the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image in which the first setting range image is displayed, so that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are a series of images. Can be used as.

Feature D4. When the first setting range image and the second setting range image both include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction The first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed in
The display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image is the predetermined individual image moved in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to a display position.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to display an image in which a predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction with a small number of image data.

Feature D5. The feature D4 is characterized in that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are images that display a large number of the predetermined individual images during a presentation period in which the predetermined individual images are displayed in large numbers. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic D5, since the first set range image and the second set range image using the same specific image data are displayed in a situation where a plurality of predetermined individual images are displayed, the same specific image data is used. What you are doing becomes less noticeable.

Feature D6. The data size of the specific image data is set to be larger than the data size of the area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage unit,
Any of the features D1 to D5, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range correspond to a range in which the entire area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage means is filled. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic D6, it is possible to make it inconspicuous that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed using the same specific image data.

Feature D7. Any one of the characteristics D1 to D6 is characterized in that the specific image data is image data created by performing a decoding process on the moving image data stored in the display storage means. The game machine described.

Even if the number of pieces of image data created by performing decoding processing on moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing, the same specific image data is provided with the configuration of the above feature D1. Since it is possible to display different images of the first setting range image and the second setting range image by using it, it is possible to prevent the same image from being displayed between a plurality of update timings. ..

Feature D8. A plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image including the specific image data so as to move in a predetermined direction. And
In the characteristic D7, the first setting range control means and the second setting range control means apply the first setting range and the second setting range to each of the plurality of image data. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic D8, it is possible to cope with a situation in which the number of pieces of image data created by performing decoding processing on moving image data is smaller than the image update timing while using the same processing configuration. It becomes possible to do.

Feature D9. A plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image including the specific image data so as to move in a predetermined direction. And
The second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image on which the first setting range image is displayed,
The second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is the predetermined individual image with respect to the first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image. The first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to the display position moved in the direction,
The display position of the predetermined individual image in the image displayed next to the second set range image by using the next use image data to be used next to the specific image data among the plurality of image data. Is the same or substantially the same movement amount as the movement amount from the first display position to the second display position with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second setting range image, the predetermined individual image The game machine according to the feature D7 or D8, wherein is the display position moved in the predetermined direction.

According to the characteristic D9, even when the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed from the same specific image data, the movement amount of the predetermined individual image in the predetermined direction between the plurality of update timings is determined. It is possible to keep it constant.

For any one of the features D1 to D9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display section;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
The first display content (size position information of the band image G24 and position information of the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image (effective period image G22) is changed and displayed in a predetermined manner is displayed. First determining means (step in the display CPU 72) for determining the first predetermined aspect information for determining the first display content by using the first predetermined aspect determination information (band display table 145) set in time series. S1606, the function of executing the processing of step S1615 and step S1616),
The second display content (the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in the predetermined manner is defined as the first predetermined aspect. Second deciding means (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S1608 and S1613) for making a decision without using the decision information;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in a predetermined manner, the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image can be individually controlled individually. This makes it possible to independently control the first display content and the second display content independently when diversifying the display manner of the change display according to the predetermined manner in the predetermined individual image, and perform the diversification. It will be easier.

Feature E2. The second determining means determines a second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in the predetermined manner, in a second predetermined aspect. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the information is determined using the second predetermined mode determination information (blinking display table 146) set in time series.

According to the feature E2, the first predetermined aspect determining information for determining the first display content and the second predetermined aspect determining information for determining the second display content are individually provided, so that each predetermined aspect is provided. It is possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently of each other while enabling the display control to be executed according to the usage information.

Feature E3. The information for determining the first predetermined mode is
A first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first predetermined reference information is set in which the reference target by the first determination means is sequentially updated each time the update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is reached. When,
A first predetermined value in which the first predetermined aspect information for determining the first display content at each update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is set in association with each of the first predetermined reference information. Aspect information group (size information and tip position information),
Equipped with
The information for determining the second predetermined mode is
A second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second predetermined reference information is set in which the reference target by the second determining means is sequentially updated every time when the second display content of the predetermined individual image is updated. When,
The second predetermined mode information for determining the second display content at each update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is set in association with each of the second predetermined reference information. Aspect information group (image data information),
The gaming machine according to feature E2, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic E3, the first predetermined reference information group dedicated to the first predetermined aspect determination information is set, and the second predetermined reference information group dedicated to the second predetermined aspect determination information is set. There is. This facilitates the independent and independent control of the update cycle of the first display content and the update cycle of the second display content.

Feature E4. A unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1610 and S1612 in the display CPU 72) for changing one of the first display content and the second display content independently of the other update cycle is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3.

According to the feature E4, the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content is changed independently of the update cycle of the other display content, thereby changing the display mode of the change display in the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image. It becomes possible to realize diversification suitably.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is sent to the display means. Display an image on the display unit based on outputting,
The predetermined individual image is displayed using the first predetermined individual image data (belt display image data 142) and the second predetermined individual image data (lighting image data 143, extinguishing image data 144),
The first display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed by using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
The second display content corresponds to the display content of the image displayed by using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
In order to set the second predetermined individual image data in the first predetermined aspect determining information in association with the first predetermined individual image data when setting the second predetermined individual image data in the setting storage means. The information (tip position information) is set, The gaming machine described in any one of the features E1 to E4.

According to the feature E5, even if the first display content and the second display content can be independently controlled individually, the second predetermined individual image data can be controlled in a manner associated with the first predetermined individual image data. It becomes possible to easily perform setting in the setting storage means.

Feature E6. One of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of the size, shape and color of the predetermined individual image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

According to the feature E6, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image can be controlled independently and individually.

For any one of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance;
A setting storage means (VRAM 204) in which the image data is set,
Derivation means (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information that determines the setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means,
Creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and outputting an image signal according to the drawing data to the display means. Display control means (VDP205) for displaying an image on the display section based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means stores predetermined types of image data (the backmost image data 241, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, image data 244 for the effect character). After displaying the predetermined type image based on the setting in the setting storage means for a front side period, the display of the predetermined type image based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means to the rear side. A predetermined type control unit (a function for executing a setting process for separate storage display in the VDP 205) is provided so as not to carry out for a period,
The parameter information derived by the deriving unit to be applied to the predetermined type image data in the front side period is stored in a predetermined storage area of a predetermined storage unit (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is the rear side period. Even the game machine is held as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type image data.

According to the feature F1, even when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is suspended, the predetermined storage area in which the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data is stored is By being held as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type image data, a new process for reserving the predetermined storage area is newly added when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is restarted. No need to do it. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is restarted.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the deriving unit updates the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data even in the rear period.

According to the feature F2, the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data is updated even in the rear side period, so that the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data after the rear side period ends. When restarted, the display state immediately before the start of the rear side period is changed to a predetermined type from the state in which the contents of the predetermined type image are continuously changed for the rear side period according to the display pattern defined in time series. It is possible to restart the display of the predetermined type image using the image data.

Feature F3. The predetermined type control means creates pre-created data (first separate saved image data 245, second separate saved image data 247) created based on setting the predetermined kind image data in the setting storage means in the front side period. ) Is used to create the drawing data in the rear period, and the gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to display the predetermined type image even in the rear period.

Feature F4. The predetermined type control means sets the pre-created data and the additional image data (the image data 246 for the additional individual image, the effect image data 248) in the setting storage means in the rear side period. The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is characterized by creating drawing data.

According to the feature F4, since the additional image data is added as the image data to be used in the rear period, it is possible to make the display content showy. Also, in the rear period, since the predetermined type image data is not used as the image data for displaying the predetermined type image, but the pre-created data is used, the additional image data is added as the image data to be used. Even if it does, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F5. The rear side period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the front side period,
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before a situation in which the predetermined start trigger may occur in the front side period.

According to the feature F5, since the pre-created data is created before the situation in which the predetermined start trigger may occur, the predetermined start trigger is generated as compared with the configuration in which the pre-created data is created at the timing when the predetermined start trigger is generated. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the timing of occurrence.

Feature F6. The predetermined type control means is continued when the predetermined start trigger does not occur by the branch timing of the pre-created data created before the predetermined start trigger may occur in the front side period. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the pre-created data is newly created in the front side period.

According to the feature F6, since the pre-created data is newly created as necessary, it is possible to use the pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing when the pre-created data is actually used. Become.

Feature F7. One of the features F3 to F6, wherein the predetermined type control unit creates a plurality of types of the pre-created data in the front period so that the contents of the image displayed by the pre-created data are different. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature F7, since a plurality of types of pre-created data are created, it is possible to diversify the situation in which the image is displayed using the pre-created data.

Feature F8. As the pre-created data, at least first pre-created data (second separate saved image data 247) and second pre-created data (first separate saved image data 245) are created.
As the rear side period, there is a first rear side period and a second rear side period that can occur after the first rear side period,
The predetermined type control means,
First pre-creation means (function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3912 in the VDP 205) that creates the drawing data by using the first pre-creation data in the first rear side period;
Second pre-creation means (function to execute the processing of steps S3906 to S3909 in the VDP 205) that creates the drawing data by using the second pre-creation data in the second rear side period;
A gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F8, it is possible to use the pre-created data suitable for each rear period.

Feature F9. The first rear side period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the front side period,
The first pre-created data and the second pre-created data are created before the predetermined start timing can occur in the front side period,
A feature F8 characterized in that the second pre-creation means newly creates the second pre-creation data in the continued front side period when the predetermined start timing does not occur in the front side period. Game machine.

According to the feature F9, if the first rear side period does not occur, the second pre-prepared data is newly created before the second rear side period occurs, so that the second pre-prepared data is actually generated. It is possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the use timing.

Feature F10. The display control means,
Arranging means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information, as the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means (a function of executing steps S2602 to S2604 in the VDP 205);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2606 in the VDP 205);
A drawing setting unit that projects the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creates the drawing data based on the data projected on the projection plane (processes of steps S2607 to S2612 in the VDP 205). Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided.

According to the feature F10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

For any one of the configurations of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The respective inventions of the characteristic group A to the characteristic group F can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. A first control means (main side MPU 52) and a second control means (sound light side MPU 62, display CPU 72, VDP 76),
The first control means is
An award determination unit (a function for executing a special figure special electric control process in the main MPU 52) that determines whether or not a privilege is given to the player,
An information transmitting unit (a function for executing a special figure special power control process in the main side MPU 52) for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of the assignment determination;
Equipped with
The second control means is
Content determination means (function for executing the processing of step S404 and step S406 to step S408 in the sound-light side MPU 62) for determining the effect content of the unit effect (effect for game turn) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information,
Effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) that controls the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the unit effect corresponding to the effect content determined by the content determination means is executed.
Equipped with
As the effect contents that can be determined by the content determining unit based on the same type of the predetermined correspondence information, the first effect content whose effect duration is the first duration and the effect duration is equivalent to the second duration. A game machine characterized in that it includes at least a second effect content.

According to the feature G1, since the effect contents having different effect durations can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the effect contents can be diversified and the process for determining the effect content can be performed. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of configuration.

Features G2. Characteristic G1 characterized in that the effect execution control means terminates the unit effect when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has passed, no matter which effect content is determined by the content determining means. The game machine described.

According to the feature G2, the unit effect ends when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information elapses regardless of which effect content is determined, and thus the duration of the effect differs from the same type of predetermined correspondence information. Even if the effect contents can be selected, the duration of the unit effect can be set to the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Features G3. The first control means includes a duration determining means (a function of executing a special figure special power control process in the main MPU 52) that determines a duration of the unit effect,
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that allows the second control means to specify the duration determined by the duration determination means.

According to the characteristic G3, even if the second control means controls the execution of the unit effect by determining the duration of the unit effect by the first control means, the second control means changes to the first control means. It becomes possible for the first control means to grasp the duration of the unit effect without the need to transmit information to. In this case, by providing the configuration of the characteristic G2, even if the effect content having a different effect duration is selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the duration of the unit effect is set to the first value. It becomes possible to make it the continuation period determined by one control means.

Features G4. The effect content determined by the content determining means is effect content in which the duration corresponding to the effect content is equal to or less than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the effect content determination. The gaming machine described in G2 or G3.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to prevent an event in which the unit effect is terminated and the unit effect is ended during the execution of the effect content determined by the content determining unit.

Features G5. The effect execution control means, as the unit effect, causes the effect execution means to perform an effect of holding the design in a predetermined area and displaying it on standby after the variable display of the design is performed,
If the duration of the effect content determined by the content determining means is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information, means for extending the execution period of the standby display (step S504 of the sound-light side MPU 62). The game machine according to any one of the features G2 to G4, which is provided with a function of executing processing.

According to the feature G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the duration of the effect content determined by the content determining means and the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is compensated. As a result, it is not necessary to greatly modify the effect contents of the unit effect to compensate for the difference, and the processing configuration for compensating for the difference can be simplified.

Features G6. The content determining means,
A unit (a function of executing the process of step S404 in the sound-light side MPU 62) for determining the effect contents of the first effect range in the unit effect by executing the first lottery process;
Means for determining the effect contents of the second effect range of the unit effect by executing the second lottery process (function of executing the process of step S406 in the sound-light side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided.

According to the feature G6, the first lottery process and the second lottery process are executed to determine the effect contents of the unit effect, so that it is possible to irregularly determine the effect contents of the unit effect. In this case, since the content of the feature G1 is provided and the effect contents having different effect durations can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the degree of freedom in designing the first lottery process and the second lottery process is increased. To be

For any one of the features G1 to G6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the above-mentioned characteristic G group can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines and the like, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing an effect such as a display effect, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display control means (for measurement display in the display CPU 72) for controlling display of the display means so that measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of measurement objects (number of game balls acquired) is displayed on the display unit. The function of executing the arithmetic processing of the display CPU 72, the function of executing the arithmetic processing for increasing display in the display CPU 72),
Equipped with
The display control means changes the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when the measurement result information is updated (change value changing means in the display CPU 72 (step S2003, step S2007, step S2010 and step S2012). Gaming machine, which has a function of executing the processing of step S2102 to step S2104 of the display CPU 72).

According to the feature H1, the measurement result information corresponding to the number of measurement targets is displayed on the display unit, so that the player can recognize the number of measurement targets. In this case, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information when the measurement result information is updated is changed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes.

Features H2. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information at the measurement time when a measurement end trigger occurs.
The game machine according to feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within a range of the one measurement time.

According to the feature H2, since the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement time, the mode in which the measurement result information changes within the range of one measurement time is diversified. It becomes possible.

Features H3. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information at the measurement time when a measurement end trigger occurs.
The game machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement time and another measurement time.

According to the feature H3, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes at each measurement time.

Features H4. The game machine according to feature H3, wherein the change value changing means sets a value corresponding to a result obtained by dividing a value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value as the change value.

According to the feature H4, it is possible to make the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information irregular according to the value finally displayed as the measurement result information.

Features H5. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing unit changes the change value according to a value to be reflected on a value displayed in the measurement result information.

According to the feature H5, the change value is changed according to the value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information, so that the change value of the value of the measurement result information is associated with the value to be reflected. It can be changed.

Features H6. Any one of the characteristics H1 to H5 is characterized in that the change value changing means sets the value of the change value to a larger value as a value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information is larger. The game machine described.

According to the feature H6, the larger the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the larger the value of the change value, so that the reflection of the value to be reflected in the measurement result information is completed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes while shortening the period required until.

Features H7. The display control means,
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to an increase in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is divided into a plurality of update timings and displayed in the measurement result information. A first reflecting means (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S2005 to S2013),
When the value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information is the value corresponding to the decrease of the measurement target value, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing. Second reflecting means (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S2003 and S2004),
Equipped with
When the value to be reflected by the first reflecting means is reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information by dividing the value to be reflected by the first reflecting means into the values displayed in the measurement result information, The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, which is characterized in that a change value can be changed.

According to the feature H7, when the value of the measurement target increases, it is possible to emphasize that the value of the measurement target is increasing by reflecting the value to be reflected separately at a plurality of update timings. Therefore, when the value of the measurement target decreases, the value to be reflected is reflected at one update timing, so that the decrease of the value of the measurement target can be made inconspicuous. In this case, since the change value at each update timing may be changed when the value of the measurement target increases, the measurement result information may change in a situation that emphasizes that the value of the measurement target is increasing. It is possible to diversify some aspects.

Feature H8. One of the characteristics H1 to H7, wherein the measurement target is a difference between an increase in the number of game media usable by the player and a decrease in the number of game media usable by the player. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic H8, when the difference between the increase amount and the decrease amount of the game media usable by the player is displayed as the measurement result information, the mode in which the measurement result information changes is diversified. It becomes possible.

For any one of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the above characteristic H group can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. An effect executing means (symbol display device 41) for executing an effect,
Production control means (sound-light side MPU 62, display CPU 201, VDP 205) for controlling the production execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means causes the effect executing means to start the special effect (effect during the special period) when the start condition is met or when the start condition is satisfied. A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step S3010 and step S3011 in the MPU 62).

According to the characteristic I1, the special effect is started when the predetermined start corresponding time is reached, so that it is possible to perform the effect when the predetermined time is reached. Further, for example, the same effect can be simultaneously started in a plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall. In addition, it is not preferable to start the special effect from the viewpoint of facilitating the understanding of the processing load and the game content by starting the special effect when the start corresponding time is reached and the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent the special effect from being started in the situation.

Feature I2. The game machine according to feature I1, wherein the time corresponding control means starts the special effect after a preparation period has elapsed when the start corresponding time comes.

According to the characteristic I2, when the start corresponding time comes, the special effect is started after the preparation period elapses, so that the start time of the special effect can be set to a predetermined time. Further, it becomes possible to disperse and execute the processing necessary for executing the special effect in the preparation period, and it is possible to disperse the processing load.

Feature I3. The effect control means causes the effect executing means to execute an arbitrary corresponding effect (an effect for game play) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing (step S3208 in the sound-light side MPU 62). A function for executing the processing of step S3213),
The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period that is equal to or longer than a longest execution period in the execution period of the arbitrary correspondence effect.

According to the characteristic I3, since the preparation period is set as a period longer than the longest execution period of the optional response, the special effect is started even if the start response time comes in the situation where the optional response is being executed. Before the timing to make it come, the arbitrary correspondence effect in the middle of its execution is ended. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution status of the arbitrary correspondence effect when the special effect is started to a predetermined condition, and the processing load at the timing when the special effect is started is extremely high. It becomes possible to prevent it.

Feature I4. The effect control means causes the effect executing means to execute an arbitrary corresponding effect (an effect for game play) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing (step S3208 in the sound-light side MPU 62). A function for executing the processing of step S3213),
When the arbitrary correspondence control means starts the arbitrary correspondence effect after the start corresponding time and before the start condition is satisfied, the effect content of the arbitrary correspondence effect is limited to a predetermined effect content. The gaming machine described in the feature I3.

According to the feature I4, it is possible to limit the effect content of the arbitrary corresponding effect when the special effect is started to the predetermined effect content. As a result, a phenomenon in which the processing load at the timing of starting the special effect becomes extremely high while allowing the optional corresponding effect to be started after the start corresponding time and before the special effect is started It is possible to prevent the occurrence of.

Feature I5. The effect control means causes the effect executing means to execute the preparation-supporting effect (production in the preparation period) until the start-up time is met and the start condition is satisfied. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of step S2806, step S2807, step S3006, and step S3007 in the side MPU 62.

According to the characteristic I5, by executing the preparation corresponding effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special effect will be executed.

Feature I6. The preparation-corresponding control means does not start the preparation-corresponding effect until the restriction condition is released when the restriction condition is satisfied at the start-corresponding time, according to characteristic I5. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic I6, when the restriction condition is satisfied, the preparation correspondence effect is not started even at the start correspondence time, so that the preparation correspondence effect is started in an unfavorable situation from the viewpoint of processing load and the like. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature I7. The game machine according to feature I6, wherein the preparation-corresponding control means causes the corresponding notification (display of the remaining time notification image G63) to be executed when the restriction condition is satisfied.

According to the feature I7, it is possible to let the player recognize that the preparation corresponding effect and the special effect will be executed even in a situation where the restriction condition is satisfied.

Feature I8. The effect control means causes the effect executing means to execute an arbitrary corresponding effect (an effect for game play) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing (step S3208 in the sound-light side MPU 62). A function for executing the processing of step S3213),
When the start corresponding time is reached in a situation where the arbitrary corresponding effect is being executed, the preparation corresponding control unit determines that the restriction condition is satisfied, and executes the preparation corresponding effect until the arbitrary corresponding effect ends. The game machine according to feature I6 or I7, which is characterized in that it is not started.

According to the feature I8, it becomes possible to prevent the preparation-ready effect from starting during the execution of the arbitrarily-adapted effect. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the processing load at the timing when the preparation-ready presentation is started becomes extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect execution means is a display means having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
When the preparation-ready effect and another effect (game-playing effect) are executed at the same time, the preparation-ready effect is executed in a partial area of the display unit, and another area (section display) of the display unit is executed. The game machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, wherein the other effect is executed in the region G66).

According to the feature I9, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize each of the preparation corresponding effect and the other effects.

Feature I10. The preparation-corresponding control means causes the effect execution means to notify, as the preparation-related effect, remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I9.

According to the characteristic I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special effect is approaching by checking the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation response control means,
Regardless of the timing at which the preparation-ready effect is started, the remaining time information is updated from a predetermined initial value information to a predetermined end value information until the remaining time information is updated. Means for continuing the above (a function of the display CPU 201 for executing the processing of step S3404),
Means for changing the one-time update value of the remaining time information according to the timing at which the preparation-ready effect is started (a function of the display CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S3402 and S3403);
A gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic I11, it becomes possible to diversify the update mode of the remaining time information in association with the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started.

Feature I12. When a predetermined time before or after the start corresponding time is satisfied and before the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined performance is executed by a performance executing means (display light emitting section 44, speaker section 45) different from the performance executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, which is provided with a means for starting an effect (a function of executing the process of step S2801 in the sound-light side MPU 62).

According to the characteristic I12, it is possible to reliably start the predetermined effect when the start corresponding time is reached. Thus, for example, regardless of the effect execution status of the effect execution means in a plurality of game machines installed in the game hall, it is possible to start a predetermined effect all at once in the plurality of game machines.

For any one of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the above-mentioned characteristic group I can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variable display of the pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. It is known that when a winning result is obtained as a result, a combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the game state shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, it is necessary to provide a novel game content in the game machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
A specific individual image (first pseudo moving image character G42, second pseudo moving image character G43, pseudo) is utilized by using the first still image data (first character image data 171) stored in advance in the display storage means. A function of executing first frame control means (display CPU 72, steps S2204 to S2207) for displaying a first frame image (first character image G41, first pseudo moving image G52) including a moving image character G51). )When,
A second frame image (second character image G48, second pseudo image) including the specific individual image is utilized by using the second still image data (second character image data 173) stored in advance in the display storage means. Second frame control means for displaying the moving image G53) (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S2217 to S2220);
At the update timing of the image after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed, the intermediate image data (effect) previously stored in the display storage means is stored. By using the image data 172), an intermediate control unit (display CPU 72 performs steps S2211 to S2214) for displaying an intermediate image (effect image G45, pseudo moving image effect image G54) that does not include the specific individual image. Function)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, the specific individual image is displayed between the update timing at which the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing at which the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. An intermediate image not included is displayed. As a result, even if there is not enough image data for the player to recognize that the moving image display of the specific individual image is being performed, the specific individual image can be inserted by interposing the intermediate image. It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display is being performed.

Features J2. The first frame control means displays the first frame image in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the first still image data in the setting storage circuit. A gaming machine according to feature J1.

According to the feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Features J3. The second frame control means displays the second frame images in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the second still image data in the setting storage circuit. The game machine according to J1 or J2.

According to the feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Features J4. In the specific effect period, the intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image, and the second frame image is displayed next to the intermediate image,
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific effect period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in a second period different from the specific effect period and the first period.

According to the feature J4, an effect of displaying a specific individual image in the specific effect period is executed by using the first still image data used in the first period and the second still image data used in the second period. It As a result, the still image data can be shared in a plurality of situations, and the storage capacity required in the display storage means can be suppressed. In this case, since the feature J1 is provided, even if the first still image data and the second still image data are used as described above, the moving image of the specific individual image in the specific effect period is generated. It is possible for the player to recognize that the display is being performed.

Features J5. With respect to a predetermined portion (predetermined portion G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image, the predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image has a predetermined operation path. The first still image data and the second still image data are set to be displayed at a position on the front side of
The intermediate image data displayed in the intermediate image (individual image G54a) is set such that the intermediate image data is set to be displaced according to the predetermined operation path. Game machine.

According to the feature J5, the intermediate image is displayed so that the intermediate image is displaced according to the operation path of the predetermined region in the specific individual image based on the first still image data and the second still image data, so that the first still image is displayed. Even when the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the image data and the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the second still image data are distant from each other, the predetermined part is displaced according to the predetermined operation path. It is possible to give the player the impression that he is doing.

Features J6. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are real images, and the intermediate image is a non-real image.

According to the feature J6, it is possible to give the player the impression that a moving image display of a specific individual image is being performed by using a non-realistic image even in a situation where there are few types of actual images. Become.

For any one of the features J1 to J6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display section using image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means,
First moving image data (first moving image data group 261 of A angle) that makes it possible to display a series of specific moving images by using the image data created by executing the decoding process;
The second moving image data (A angle) that makes it possible to display the specific moving image that starts from the timing in the middle of the specific moving image by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. Second video data group 262) of
A game machine characterized by storing in advance.

According to the characteristic K1, since not only the first moving image data but also the second moving image data is provided, the first moving image data and the second moving image are used as objects to be used according to the timing at which the display start trigger occurs. It becomes possible to select any of the data. With this, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the beginning of the specific moving image and the display of the specific moving image can be started from the middle of the specific moving image only by switching the moving image data to be used.

Features K2. The first moving image data has a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) with different corresponding display periods in the specific moving image.
The second moving image data includes a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) with different corresponding display periods in the specific moving image.
Each of the second unit moving image data is a moving image that is started from the middle timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data in the corresponding order in the plurality of first unit moving image data. The gaming machine described in the feature K1, which is set as data to be displayed.

According to the characteristic K2, it is possible to set a large number of timings at which it is possible to start the specific moving image in the middle, and it becomes easy to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the timing at which the display start timing occurs.

Features K3. In the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order, the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are displayed. The shift amount of the image update timing from the start timing of the moving image displayed by using is the same in each of the combinations of the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order. Or, the gaming machine described in the feature K2, which is substantially the same.

According to the characteristic K3, it is possible to facilitate the design of the timing at which the display of the moving image by the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the display of the moving image by the second unit moving image data can be started. To be

Features K4. The first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data in which the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data. Characteristic feature The game machine described in K2 or K3.

According to the characteristic K4, it is possible to set a large number of timings at which it is possible to switch to the display of the moving image by the first moving image data and at which timings at which the display of the moving image by the second moving image data can be switched. Further, it is possible to reduce the data amount of moving image data read at one time.

Features K5. When the player performs a predetermined operation at a timing before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, the display control means starts the display of the specific moving image using the first moving image data, When the predetermined operation is performed at a timing later than the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, target switching means (step in the display CPU 201) for starting the display of the specific moving image using the second moving image data. The game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of S4105 to S4117.

According to the characteristic K5, even if the predetermined operation by the player occurs at an arbitrary timing, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the situation corresponding to the timing at which the predetermined operation occurs.

Features K6. The target switching means is a case where the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific intermediate moving image. Also, if the predetermined operation is performed after the timing before the period required to start using the second moving image data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start, the second moving image data The game machine according to Feature K5, wherein the display of the specific midway moving image using is not started.

According to the characteristic K6, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the situation corresponding to the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined operation within the range in which the use of the second moving image data can be smoothly started.

Features K7. The display control means is a target switching means (in the display CPU 201, which switches to a state in which another moving image is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by the player in a state in which any one of a plurality of moving images is displayed. A function of executing the processing of steps S4105 to S4117),
A combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a first moving image among the plurality of types of moving images,
The display storage means,
Third moving image data (a first moving image data group 264 of B angle) that makes it possible to display a series of predetermined moving images by using the image data created by executing the decoding process,
The fourth moving image data (B angle) that enables the display of a predetermined moving image starting from the timing of the predetermined moving image by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. Second moving image data group 265) of
Is stored in advance,
A combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a second moving image of the plurality of types of moving images, and the combination of the features K1 to K6. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the characteristic K7, it is possible to set a large number of timings at which the moving image to be displayed can be switched between the first moving image and the second moving image.

Features K8. The first moving image data and the third moving image data have the same timing at which a start image can be displayed in a predetermined effect period,
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data have the same timing at which a start image can be displayed in the predetermined effect period.

According to the characteristic K8, when one of the first moving image and the second moving image is switched to the other, it is possible to start displaying the switching destination moving image from the display content corresponding to the display content of the switching source.

Features K9. The game machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images having different angles for displaying special individual images.

According to the feature K9, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images having different angles for displaying the special individual image.

Features K10. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a),
Display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display section using image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means uses predetermined image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) capable of displaying a series of special moving images by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. ) Is stored in advance,
The predetermined moving image data has a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) with different corresponding display periods in the special moving image.
The special unit moving image data is data in which the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is a minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

According to the characteristic K10, it is possible to set a large number of timings at which the display can be switched to the display of the moving image based on the predetermined moving image data. Further, it is possible to reduce the data amount of moving image data read at one time.

For any one of the features K1 to K10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic J group and the characteristic K group can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped pattern.

10... Pachinko machine, 41... Symbol display device, 41a... Liquid crystal display part, 44... Display light emitting part, 45... Speaker part, 52... Main side MPU, 62... Sound and light side MPU, 72... Display CPU, 74... Memory module , 76... VDP, 82a... First frame area, 82b... Second frame area, 122... Character retention table, 123... Character moving table, 124... Background table, 125... Linkage flag, 132... Decoded image data , 142... Image data for band display, 143... Image data for lighting, 144... Image data for turning off, 145... Table for band display, 146... Table for blinking display, 171... Image data for first character, 172... Effect image Data, 173... Image data for second character, 201... Display CPU, 202... Work RAM, 203... Memory module, 204... VRAM, 205... VDP, 211... VRAM, 211a... Texture area, 211b... Movie data area , 241... Backmost image data, 242... Image data for first background individual image, 243... Image data for second background individual image, 244... Image data for effect character, 245... First saved image data 246... Image data for additional individual image, 247... Second saved image data, 248... Effect image data, 261-269... Moving image data group, 271a-273c... Moving image data, 282... Special moving image data, 284 ... still image data, G4... loop display character, G5... loop display background, G11... group display character, G22... effective period image, G24... band image, G25... blinking image, G31... number display image, G41... First character image, G42... First pseudo moving image character, G43... Second pseudo moving image character, G45... Effect image, G48... Second character image, G51... Pseudo moving image character, G51a... Predetermined part, G52 ... first pseudo moving image, G53... second pseudo moving image, G54... pseudo moving effect image, G54a... individual image, G63... remaining time notification image, G66... partition display area, T10... execution for acceleration period Target table, T11... Execution target table for first high speed period, T12... Execution target table for first low speed period.

Claims (2)

Display means having a display part;
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
Display control means for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means and displaying an image on the display section based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
First frame control means for displaying a first frame image including a specific individual image using the first still image data stored in advance in the display storage means;
Second frame control means for displaying a second frame image including the specific individual image by using second still image data stored in advance in the display storage means,
At the update timing of the image after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed, the intermediate image data previously stored in the display storage means is used. And an intermediate control means for displaying an intermediate image that does not include the specific individual image,
Equipped with
The predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image is the position on the front side of the predetermined operation path with respect to the predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image. The first still image data and the second still image data are set so that
A game machine characterized in that the midway image data is set so that the midway individual image displayed in the midway image is displaced according to the predetermined operation path. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played by utilizing a game value.

Images